TEC Ma-1650 program manual - 4S Business Systems Inc.

TEC Electronic Cash Register 

MA-1650-4 SERIES 

Programming Manual 

Original Apr., 1996 

(Revised Apr., 1998) 

Document No. EO3-11070B 

PRINTED IN JAPAN

PROGRAMMING MANUAL 

(Stand-alone Level) 

EO8-11092 

MA-1350-2 SERIES

MA-1650-4 STAND-ALONE LEVEL 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Chapter page 

1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................. 1 

2. MAIN FEATURES ............................................................................... 1 

3. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................ 2 

4. CAPACITIES ....................................................................................... 5 

5. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE ................................................. 13 

6. RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, STATUS CLEAR ............................... 16 

7. TERMINAL FILE PROGRAMMING .................................................. 19 

8. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA ................................... 177 

EO3-11070 

Copyright © 1999 

by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 

All Rights Reserved 

570 Ohito, Ohito-cho, Tagata-gun, Shizuoka-ken, JAPAN

1. INTRODUCTION 

- 1 - 

EO3-11070 


This programming manual for TEC electronic cash register MA-1650 series is provided for salespersons, field 

engineers and other personnel. 

This manual is comprised of two parts: Stand-alone level and Master-Satellite level. The Master-Satellite level 

handles addition to and changes of the Stand-alone level only. Please be sure to read the Stand-alone level first. 

2. MAIN FEATURES 

 

- Provides machine containing expandability and interface boards 

- High speed processing using a 16-bit CPU 

- Up to 4 MB memory capacity 

- High speed printing by a new dot printer 

- Scanning function (when the option board is installed) 

- Detachable drawer 

 

- The PLU/Cashier/Check track/Data capture/Negative card check functions can be programmed in the 

allocation system. 

- Files for up to 65,000 PLUs and 99 cashiers can be controlled. 

- File backup function by connecting the backup master terminal 

- Cashier management on the master terminal (floating cashier system) 

- PLU addition function 

- Transaction data capture function configured by connecting the PC 

- Cashier training function

3. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS 

3.1 TERMINAL MODEL CONFIGURATIONS 

M A - 1 6 5 0 - 4 - - 

Series Type: 

US/CA series 

Standard Models: MA-1650-4-S-US 

MA-1650-4T-S-US 

Destination Code: 

(US, etc.) 

Drawer Type 

S: SP drawer 

A: New SP drawer 

Validation Type 

Blank: 1 line 

M: Multi (11) lines 

FIU Type 

Blank: 7-segment only (1 line) 

T: 7-segment + 16-digit dot windows (2 lines) 

3.2 FIELD OPTION MODEL CONFIGURATIONS 

IF-232-1650-QM 

IF-1650C-QM 

IF-1650MS- 

Destination Code: (US, etc.) 

IF-1650EXS-QM 

KRAM- - QM 

Memory Size 

H: 0.5 MB 

1: 1 MB 

2: 2MB 

KPSD-1650-QM 

KRD-1650- 

Destination Code: (QM, etc.) 

RD-N -QM 

Money Case Type 

4: MC-4 

8: MC-8 

- 2 - 

EO3-11070 

MA-1650-4 SERIES

- 3 - 

EO3-11070 


(Revision Date: Aug. 26, 2004) 

SIZE: 460 mm (width) x 450 mm (depth) x 348 mm (height) ... including rubber feet 

or 412 mm (height) when Customer Display is popped up. 

WEIGHT: 16.5 kg 

POWER REQUIRED: AC 117 V, 100 V, 230 V ± 10%; 50/60 Hz ± 10% 

(varies depending on the destination) 

POWER CONSUMED: 0.6 A 

BATTERY: Type .................... Lithium-vanadium battery 

Back-up duration.. 1 month (in case of full charge) 

Charge method .... Turning on the power switch (when applying the current) 

Full charge time ... 48 hours or more 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 0°C to 35°C 

RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 10% to 90% RH 

HARDWARE COMPONENTS: 

CPU 

Dot Printer 

DPR-245 

24 + 24 characters 

Ordinary Keyboard 

Max. 90 keys 

Flat Keyboard 

Max. 145 keys 

7-segment 10 digits 

16-digit Dot Window 

(Dealer option) 

7-segment 7 digits 

16-digit Dot Window 

(Field option) 

Remote Slip Printer 

42 characters/line 

Hand Scanner 

Parallel Scale 

Scanner 

Scale 

R/J Printer TOD 

Keyboard 

FIU 

FIU 

RIU 

RIU 

DRS-207 

OCIA I/F 

SCALE I/F 

RS-485 I/F 

PC I/F 

ROM 

RAM 

DRAWER 

TKB-1 

PL-3 

PK-2 

RAM 

1024 KB 

384 KB 

Max. 4 drawers 

Programming 

Keyboard 

Program Loader 

(MAIN JOB SEL. 

S/W No. 1) 

PLU Keyboard 

130 keys 

RS-485 

RS-232C 

Option 

Expansion RAM 

Max. 4 MB 

Stand-alone 

Scanner Kit 

Scale Kit 

M/S Kit 

PC Kit

- 4 - 

EO3-11070 


NUMBER OF KEYS ON THE KEYBOARD: Ordinary (Stroke Type) Keyboard ... Max. 90 keys 

Flat (Moisture-proof) Keyboard ... Max. 145 keys 

PLU Keyboard (PK-2) ... Max. 130 keys (option) 

KEY ENTRY METHOD: Two-key Roll-over 

DISPLAY: OPERATOR DISPLAY: Upper Row (Factory option) ... 16-digit dot fluorescent display 

Display Color ... green 

Lower Row ... 10-digit 7-segment fluorescent display 


Amount ... 8 digits (7 digits for registering) 

Department Code ... 2 digits 

Repeat Count ... 1 digit 

Triangular Lamps ... 6 

LED display ... 2 

CUSTOMER DISPLAY: Upper Row (Field option) ... 16-digit dot fluorescent display 


Lower Row ... 7-digit 7-segment fluorescent display 


Amount ... 7 digits 

Triangular Lamps ... 3 

PRINTER: 

Model ....................................... DPR-245A 

Print Method ............................. Serial Dot Matrix, bi-direction printing 

Number of Stations .................. Two stations (Journal and Receipt) 

Print Speed .............................. Approx. 4.0 lines/second 

Printable Digits ......................... 24 digits on Journal 

24 digits on Receipt 

55 digits on validation slip 

Character Size ......................... 3.12 mm (height) x 1.34 mm (width) 

Digit Space ............................... 1.56 mm 

Line Space ............................... 4.23 mm 

Character Components ............ 7 x 9 dots (including half dots) 

Paper Roll Size ........................ Common for Journal and Receipt: 

45+0.1 or -0.5 mm(width) x 80mm(diameter), 0.07 to 0.09 mm(thickness) 

Paper Feed Mechanism ........... Journal and Receipt are fed independently from each other. 

Store Name Print ..................... Rubber Stamp or 4-line Dot Print selective. 

Stamp Face Size ... 34 mm (width) x 20 mm (length) 

Receipt-cut Method .................. Manual cut, Auto cut (Factory option) 

Printing Media .......................... Fabric Ink Ribbon, Cassette Type 

Detective Functions ................. Journal/Receipt Paper-end Detector 

Validation Slip Set Detector 

Validation Print Function .......... Printable Digits ... 55 digits 

Paper Size ... 135 mm (minimum width) 70 mm (minimum length) 

Multi Validation ......................... 11 lines 

DRAWER: 

The size of the drawer and the specifications of the money case varies depending on the individual product 

standards. 

Drawer-open Detector .............. Provide

4. CAPACITIES 

INDEXING CAPACITIES: 

Input Item Digits Remarks 

Amount 7 

Quantity in Multiplication 6 3 integer digits + 3 decimal digits 

Unit Price in Multiplication 6 

Scale Unit Price 6 Parallel Type Scale 

Tender by Media Keys 8 

Non-add Number 18 

Percent Rate 5 2 integer digits + 3 decimal digits 

Tax Rate 6 2 integer digits + 4 decimal digits 

Selective Itemizer Rate 5 2 integer digits + 3 decimal digits 

PLU Code 6 or 13 6 or 13 by sistem option 

Cashier Code 4 2-digit secret + 2-digit manager-assign 

Salesperson Code 2 1 to 99 

Credit Card Company ID Code 2 1 to 12 

Check Track (Customer File) Code 12 1 to 999999999999 

Scale Weight 4 or 5 4 digits for LB, 5 digits for Kg 

Check No. 15 1 to 999999999999999 

Tare Table 1 1 to 9 

GST Rate 4 2 integer digits + 2 decimal digits 

Department Code 2 1 to 99 

Minor/Major Group Code 2 Minor: 1 to 30, Major: 1 to 10 

PLU Group Code 2 1 to 99 

Non-taxable Amount Limit 4 1 to 9999 

Negative Card No. 19 1 to 9999999999999999999 

- 5 - 

EO3-11070 


BASIC MEMORY CAPACITIES: 

(NOTE: At item counts, “6+2 dig.” means that it has 6 integer digits and 2 decimal digits.) 

Major Group Memory (max. 10 Major Groups) 

Memory Type Counter or Total digits 

Daily Memory Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

GT Memory Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

- 6 - 

EO3-11070 


The same memory capacity is also provided for the Total of All Major Groups as an individual Major Group. 

Minor Group Memory (max. 30 Minor Groups) 



Amount 10 


Amount 10 

The same memory capacity is also provided for the Total of All Minor Groups as an individual Minor Group. 

Department Memory (max. 99 departments) 


Daily Memory Customer Count 6 

Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Dollar/% Discount Count 6 

Amount 10 

Return Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Item Correct/Void Count 6 

Amount 10 

Store Coupon Count 6 

Amount 10 

- Mode Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Positive Dept. Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Negative Dept. Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

GT Memory Same as Daily Memory

Credit Card Company Sales Memory (max. 12 credit card companies) 

- 7 - 

EO3-11070 


PLU Memory (900 PLUs (standard); max. 1500 PLUs without PLU Inquiry option or with Standard Memory 

use; max. 65000 PLUs with PLU Inquiry option or with Expansion Memory use; the maximum number of PLUs 

varies depending on the RAM allocation.) 



Amount 10 


Amount 10 

NOTE: When the PLU Inquiry option is selected or when the Expansion Memory is used, no GT Memory is 

provided. 

NOTE: When the PLU Inquiry option is selected or when the Expansion Memory is used, no GT Memory is 

provided. 

Hourly Range Memory (max. 24 hour ranges) 


Daily Memory only Customer Count 6 


Amount 10 


Daily Memory Count 6 

Amount 10 

GT Memory Count 6 

Amount 10 

Check Track Memory (500 Customer Files (standard); max. 1000 Customer Files with Standard Memory use; 

max. 3000 Customer Files with Expansion Memory use; the maximum number of files varies depending on the 

RAM allocation.) 


Memory Amount 10

Salesperson Memory (max. 99 salespersons) 


Daily Memory Net Sale without Tax 


Amount 10 

Net Sale with Tax 


Amount 10 

Gross Sale Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Return Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

PLU Group Memory (max. 99 PLU Groups) 



Amount 10 


Amount 10 

-- continued on next page -- 

- 8 - 

EO3-11070 


The same memory capacity is also provided for the Total of All PLU Groups as an individual PLU Group. 

Negative Card Memory (max. 3000 when Expansion Memory is used; the max. number of files varies depending 

on the RAM Allocation.) 

Financial Memory 

DAILY GT 

NAME OF TOTAL/COUNTER 

COUNTER COUNTER TOTAL COUNTER TOTAL 

REMARKS 

DIGITS TYPE DIGITS DIGITS DIGITS 

GT (Grand Total) 16 (16) Non-resettable 

NET GT (All-media Sales GT) 16 (16) Non-resettable 

GS (Gross Sale) 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

% I (% +) 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 if [%I] is used as %+ 

% II (% +) 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 if [%II] is used as %+ 

Net Sale Without Tax 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

GST 10 10

Financial Memory (continued) 


COUNTER 

DIGITS 

Tax 1 to Tax 4 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Tax 5 (Manual Tax) 10 10 

Net Sale With Tax 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

Positive Other Income Depts 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

Negative Other Income Depts 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

% I on Subtotal (% -) 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 if [%I] is used as %- 

% II on Subtotal (% -) 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 if [%II] is used as %- 

Vendor Coupon 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 

Dollar Discount 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 

Bottle Return (Inside-sale Type) 6 ITEM 10 6 10 

All-media Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Cash Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Check Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Charge Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Misc. Media Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Credit 1 Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Credit 2 Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Debit Card Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

EBT Cash Card Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

EBT F/S Card Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Food Stamp Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Received-on-Account 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 

Paid-Out 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 

Loan 10 

Pick Up 6 ENTRY 10 

Cash-in-drawer 10 10 

Check-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

Charge-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

Misc. Media-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

Credit 1-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

Credit 2-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

DAILY GT 

COUNTER 

TYPE 


- 9 - 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

COUNTER 

DIGITS 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

REMARKS 

EO3-11070 




COUNTER 

DIGITS 

Debit-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

EBT Cash-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

EBT F/S-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

Food Stamp-in-drawer 6 ENTRY 10 

Food Stamp Change 10 

DAILY GT 

COUNTER 

TYPE 

Item Correct 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 Item Corr on DP+/PLU+ 

Void 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 Void on DP+/PLU+ 

Misc. Void 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 Item Corr on others 

All Void 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 Transaction All Void 

% I on Line Items (% -) 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 if [%I] is used as %- 

% II on Line Items (% -) 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 if [%II] is used as %- 

Dollar Discount on Line Items 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 

Store Coupon 6 ITEM 10 6 10 

Negative Departments Total 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

Returned Merchandise 6 + 2 ITEM 10 6 + 2 10 

Negative Tax 10 10 

Negative Sales (Audaction) 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Negative Mode ( - ) Total 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 

Transfer Balance GT 10 10 

Transfer + GT 10 10 

Transfer - GT 10 10 

Transfer + Daily 10 10 

Transfer - Daily 10 10 

Previous Balance Sales 6 CUS 10 6 10 

Previous Balance R/A 10 10 Payments made for PB 

Previous Balance PO 10 10 PB refunded to customers 

GST Taxable Total 10 10 

Taxable Total 1 to 4 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Selective Itemizer 1 & 2 2 x 6 ENTRY 2 x 10 2 x 6 2 x 10 

Tax-exempted Customer 6 CUS 6 

GST Exempt 10 10 


- 10 - 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

COUNTER 

DIGITS 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

REMARKS 

EO3-11070 


*



COUNTER 

DIGITS 

DAILY GT 

COUNTER 

TYPE 

Tax 1 to 4 Exempt 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Tax Exempt 1 to 4 by Food Stamp 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Foreign Currencies 1 to 5 5 x 6 ENTRY 5 x 10 In-drawer Totals 

SP. Rounding for Foreign 

Currencies 

10 

Net Sale Item Count per 

Customer 

6 + 2 ITEM 6 + 2 

Net Sale Without Tax per Cus. 10 10 

No-sale Counter 6 ENTRY 

Validation Counter 6 ENTRY 

HOLD Counter 6 ENTRY 

Off-line Auth 6 ENTRY 10 6 10 


COUNTER 

DIGITS 

- 11 - 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

COUNTER 

DIGITS 

DAILY GT 

COUNTER 

TYPE 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

COUNTER 

DIGITS 

Reset Report Counter 4 ENTRY 4 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

REMARKS 

REMARKS 

EO3-11070 


* On V2.0 or after, the system option allows you to select that the memories of Transfer GT items are reset to 

0 together with those of Transfer daily items on taking the All Check Track Reset report. 

* On V3.0 or after, the names for the media key and the corresponding in-drawer are changed as follows. 

(Before V3.0) (From V3.0 or after) 

• Media-coupon Credit 1 

• Credit 1 Credit 2 

• Credit 2 Debit 

• Credit 3 EBT Cash 

• Credit 4 EBT F/S 

Also, the item “Off-line Auth” is available for V3.0 or after. 

Cashier Memory (max. 15 cashiers with Standard Memory; max. 99 cashiers with Expansion Memory) 

• The Cashier Memory for each cashier has the same contents of Daily Memory and GT Memory as the 

Financial Memory already described except that the following items are not provided for the Cashier 

Memory: 

GT (Grand Total), NET GT (All-media Sales GT), Off-line Auth; V3.0 or after 

• The following is memory item that are provided exclusively to the Cashier Memory for each cashier and not 

provided in the Financial Memory:. 

NOTE: The number of cashiers depends on whether Standard Memory or Expansion Memory is used: 

With Standard Memory use: max. 15 cashiers 

With Expansion Memory use: max. 99 cashiers 

The memory selection is determined by the RAM Allocation.

Others 


COUNTER 

DIGITS 

DAILY GT 

COUNTER 

TYPE 

Hourly Range Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 

- 12 - 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

COUNTER 

DIGITS 

PLU Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 4 

Department Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 4 

Financial Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 4 

PLU Group Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 4 

Salesperson Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 

Credit Card Co. Reset Counter 4 ENTRY 4 

TOTAL 

DIGITS 

REMARKS 

EO3-11070 


MEMORY BALANCE: 

1. GT (Grand Total) = Sum of Daily GS (Gross Sale) 

2. NET GT = Sum of Daily All-media Sales 

3. GS (Gross Sale) = (Sum of Positive Depts) + (Sum of Taxes)*** + (%+) + (Item Correct) + (Void) + 

(%- on Line Items) + (Dollar Discount on Line Items) + (Store Coupon) + 

(Returned merchandise) + (Negative Tax)*** + (Negative Mode Total) + (All Void) + 

(GST) 

4. Net Sale With Tax = (Sum of All Depts)* + (Sum of Taxes)*** + (%+)+ (GST) 

= (GS) - (Item Correct) - (Void) - (%- on Line Items) - (Dollar Discount on Line Items) - 

(Store Coupon) - (Sum of Negative Depts) - (Returned Merchandise) - 

(Negative Tax)*** - (Negative Mode Total) - (All Void)** 

5. All-media Sales = (Net Sale With Tax) - (%- on Subtotal) - (Vendor Coupon) - (Dollar Discount ) - 

(Bottle Return) 

± (Selective Itemizer Totals) + (Positive Other Income Depts) 

| - (Negative Other Income Dept) 

(when the option “SI/TL Add to or Subtract from sale” is selected) 

= (Cash Sales) + (Check Sales) + (Charge Sales) + (Misc. Sales) + (Media-Coupon Sales) 

+ (Food Stamp Sales) + (Previous Balance Sales) + (Credit 1 to 4 Sales) 

6. Sum of Hourly Range Sales = Net Sale With Tax (US Balance) 

... if Financial Reset Report and Hourly Range Reset Report are taken at the same time 

7. Sum of Hourly Range Sales = Net Sale Without Tax (Canada Balance) 

... if Financial Reset Report and Hourly Range Reset Report are taken at the same time 

8. Negative Mode Total = GS in the Negative Mode 

9. Net Sale Item Count per Customer = (Item Count of Net Sale with Tax) 

÷ (Customer Count of All-media Sales ) 

Net Sale per Customer = (Amount of Net Sale without Tax) 

÷ (Customer Count of All-media Sales) 

(Sum of All Depts)* = (Sum of Positive Depts) + (Sum of Negative Depts) but excluding Other Income Depts 

(All Void)** = (Sum of the amount processed into the GS memory by the time of All Voiding) 

(Sum of Taxes)***, (Negative Tax)*** = (Amount of exclusive taxes only, inclusive taxes are excluded.) 

Inclusive tax feature is applicable for V1.9 or after.

5. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE 

Case 1: To start-up using the MA-1650 terminal only: 

RAM Clear 

(Chapter 6) 

RAM Allocation Setting 

(Chapter 7, Submode 79) 

All the programming operations 

required as a terminal 

(Chapter 7) 

Case 2: To start-up by installing programming data from the PC: 

RAM Clear 

(Chapter 6) 

➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ 

➤ 

RAM Allocation Setting 


PC Transmission Information 

Setting 


Turn OFF then ON the terminal power. 

DLL (Down Line Loading) of the data 

set at PC, to the terminal 

- 13 - 

For using Expansion Memory, perform 

this setting. For using Standard Memory, 

this setting is necessary only for using 

any other than the default value for 

memory allocation. 

Perform this setting for using Expansion 

Memory. For using Standard Memory, 

this setting is necessary only for using 

any other than the default value for 

memory allocation. 

Perform this setting only for 

selecting any other than the 

default value. 

Perform this operation 

only when the PC Transmission 

Information 

Setting (above) has been 

performed. 

EO3-11070 


Case 3: To start-up using a PL-3: 

When the expansion memory is not installed, the terminal can be started up by the PL-3. 

FDK Format 

➤ ➤ ➤ 

Save preprogrammed terminal data onto the PL-3. 

Load data saved into the PL-3 into another terminal. 

Perform Data Clear (Chapter 6) on the terminal. 

- 14 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: The expansion memory cannot be saved/loaded. 

For files to be programmed in the expansion memory, refer to RAM Allocation Setting (Submode 79 in 

Chapter 6). 

The following are the procedures of FDK Formatting of FDKs for saving, Program Data Save/Load operations as 

to the MA-1650 terminal. Use FDKs of 2DD or 2HD type. 

• FDK Formatting 

Before any data may be saved to floppy diskettes by the PL-3 unit, the diskettes must be formatted. Since the 

save format is in MS-DOS, these diskettes may be formatted on the PC, or they may be formatted on the PL- 

3 through the following steps: 

(1) Connect the PL-3 to a power source. This may be either from the AC adapter, or from an ECR through 

the bus direct cable. Remember, that if connecting to an ECR by the bus direct cable, never connect or 

disconnect the cable to/from the ECR until the ECR power has been turned off for at least 15 seconds. 

(2) Insert the floppy disk to be formatted into the PL-3 FDD. 

(3) Set the PL-3 digital switch Main No. to 9, and the Sub No. to one of the following: 

0 to format for 640 KB 

1 to format for 720 KB 

2 to format for 1.44 MB (2HD diskette only) 

3 to format for 1.2 MB (2HD diskette only) 

(4) Press the SAVE switch. The format will begin as indicated by the SAVE LED being illuminated. When 

the SAVE LED goes out, and the display shows “00,” the format operation is completed successfully. 

(5) Remove the formatted diskette. Additional diskettes may be formatted in the same way. 

(6) Disconnect the PL-3 from the power source. If connected to an ECR through the bus direct cable, make 

sure the ECR power has been off at least 15 seconds before disconnecting the bus direct cable.

- 15 - 

EO3-11070 


• Program Data Save/Load 

(1) Turn OFF the ECR power, and wait for 15 seconds. 

(2) Connect one end of the bus direct cable to the PL-3 unit, and the other end to the PL-3 interface connector 

of the ECR. 

(3) Set the PL-3 digital switch Main No. to 9 and the Sub No. to 9. 

(4) Turn on the ECR power. This will cause the PL-3 to perform status clear. When both the LOAD and SAVE 

switch go out, and the display shows Åg00,Åh the status clear is complete. 

(5) Turn off the ECR power. 

(6) Set the PL-3 digital switch Main No. to 1. 

(7) Set the PL-3 digital switch Sub No. to a value of 0Å‘9 to indicate the file number of the save data on the 

diskette. (Each diskette may contain up to ten separate files, depending on the size of the saved data 

file.) 

(8) If the operation is to be a SAVE operation, then insert a formatted diskette into the PL-3 floppy drive. If 

the operation is to be a LOAD operation, insert the diskette containing the previously saved programmed 

data. 

(9) Turn ON the ECR power. Wait a few seconds to allow the FDD heads to recalibrate. 

(10) If the operation is to be a save operation, press the SAVE switch. If the operation is to be a load operation, 

press the LOAD switch. The save or load operation will begin as indicated by the SAVE switch or LOAD 

switch LED illuminating. When the LED goes out, and the PL-3 display shows Åg00,Åh the operation 

has successfully completed. (If an error occurs, the PL-3 will show an error code.) 

(11) Turn off the ECR power and wait for 15 seconds before disconnecting the PL-3 bus direct cable from the 

ECR. 

NOTE: Make sure that the PL-3 bus direct cable is never connected or disconnected to/from the ECR if the 

ECR power is turned ON, or damage to both the ECR and the PL-3 circuits will result.

6. RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, STATUS CLEAR 

RAM CLEAR 

Numeric Keys to be Keyboard Zero-suppress 

held down Type Form 

[1] & [8] Flat Type .--0 

[1] & [9] Ordinary Type .--0 

[3] & [8] Flat Type 0.00 

[3] & [9] Ordinary Type 0.00 

Numeric Keys to be Keyboard Zero-suppress 

held down Type Form 

[1] Ordinary or Flat .--0 

[3] Ordinary or Flat 0.00 

- 16 - 

EO3-11070 


If the register becomes completely inoperative due to battery discharge or malfunction of program memory, the 

RAM clear operation must be carried out following the procedure listed below. When a RAM clear is operated, 

all the memory content that has been stored in the RAM will be cleared (i.e. the programmed data and the sales 

data will be cleared). A RAM Clear is also necessary to determine the type of the ECR keyboard. 

1. Turn the Power Switch to OFF. 

2. Turn the Mode Lock to the “BLIND” position. 

3. Hold down the numeric keys listed below according to the zero-suppress form and the type of keyboard 

installed. The numeric key pressing must be held till Step 5 is completed. 

4. Turn the Power Switch to ON. 

5. When a short tone (indicating the key input) is heard, release the two numeric keys. A receipt is issued. 

NOTES: 1. On completion of Step 5, all the memory will be cleared, and at the same time the keyboard 

will automatically be programmed as specified in the “Standard Keyboard”. 

2. Along with the “Initial Keyboard”, the Standard Program Data for FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM 

NAME and PRINT LINE ITEM NAME, etc. will also be set automatically. 

DATA CLEAR 

If only the sales data must be cleared, the Data Clear should be operated. When a Data Clear is operated, all 

the sales data including the non-resettable totals and counters will be cleared but the programmed data will not. 

To operate, follow Steps 1 through 5 for the RAM CLEAR above, except that: 

In Step 3, hold down the following numeric key for the DATA CLEAR (instead of two numeric keys for the RAM 

CLEAR) until Step 5 is completed. 

NOTE: The only difference in the result between the DATA CLEAR and a RAM CLEAR is that only the sales 

data are cleared by the DATA CLEAR while the programmed data are cleared as well by a RAM 

CLEAR.

STATUS CLEAR 

- 17 - 

EO3-11070 


The Status Clear operation will only clear an error or key-lock condition that disables normal operations. Thus 

the sales data and programmed data will not be cleared (except when a Status Clear is used to clear a key-lock 

during a sale, the sale item data already entered in the sale will be cleared). 

The Status Clear can also be used to obtain an “after sales data reset” condition. This condition is required for 

some programming operations and is usually obtained by following the directions (or using a Data Clear or RAM 

Clear). However, when you visit your customer and must add or change some programming data where an “after 

sales data reset” condition is required, the customer may not want the sales data to be reset. In such cases, the 

Status Clear can be used because it obtains the “after all sales data resets” condition but will not affect any sales 

data. Please be careful in using this function; depending on the programming item, sales data resets may be 

necessary instead of a Status Clear, to keep consistency between the programmed data and the sales data. 

To execute a Status Clear, follow Steps 1 through 5 for the RAM CLEAR, except that: 

In Step 3, hold down the numeric key [0] only until Step 5 is completed. 

-- OPERATION FLOW CHART FOR RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, AND STATUS CLEAR -- 

Step 1: Power OFF 

➤ ➤ 

Step 2: Mode Lock to “BLIND” position. 

Step 3: Numeric Key held down: 

RAM CLEAR 

[1] & [8] for (.--0) 

[3] & [8] for (0.00) 

Step 4: Power ON 

➤ ➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

DATA CLEAR 

[1] for (.--0) 

[3] for (0.00) 

Step 5: Release the Numeric Key (s). 

A short tone is heard. 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

Z 

(BLIND) 

STATUS CLEAR 

[0] to obtain “after reset” condition or to 

clear error/key-locked condition

11-14-1994 MON #0 

RAM-C 

P00 

0001 11:28TM 

-- RECEIPT SAMPLES -- 

RAM CLEAR DATA CLEAR STATUS CLEAR 

11-14-1994 MON #0 

DATA-C 

P00 

- 18 - 

0001 11:30TM 

11-14-1994 MON #0 

STATUS-C 

P00 

EO3-11070 


0002 11:30TM

7. TERMINAL FILE PROGRAMMING 

TABLE OF TERMINAL FILE PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS 

- 19 - 

EO3-11070 


BASIC KEY FUNCTIONS AND KEYBOARD VARIATIONS IN PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .............................................................. 21 

CHARACTER ENTRIES ............................................................................................................................................................................... 22 

CONDITION REQUIRED FOR PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS ............................................................................................................... 29 

PROGRAMMING ITEM CONDITION (NOTE) Mode/Submode No. PAGE 

SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) PROGRAMMING ......................................... All Resets ............................... BLIND ...................... 30 

RAM ALLOCATION .................................................................................................. TC .......................................... BLIND/79 ................. 36 

TABLE CLEAR ......................................................................................................... Anytime .................................. BLIND/91 ................. 38 

SYSTEM OPTION PROGRAMMING ....................................................................... FZ ........................................... BLIND/18 

SET/18 or 11 ............ 39 

STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING ..... Anytime .................................. SET/1 ....................... 68 

CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING ..................................................... Anytime/CZ ............................ SET/2 ....................... 70 

DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING ............................................................... Anytime/DZ,DGZ,PZ,PGZ ...... SET/3 ....................... 73 

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING ................................................................................. Anytime/PZ ............................. SET/4 ....................... 82 

TIME SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/5 ....................... 91 

DATE SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................ Anytime .................................. SET/6 ....................... 91 

HOURLY RANGE SETTING .................................................................................... HZ .......................................... SET/7 ....................... 92 

AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING FOR FUNCTION KEYS ................................................ Anytime .................................. SET/8 ....................... 93 

FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME PROGRAMMING ............................................. FZ,FGZ ................................... SET/9 ....................... 94 

PRINT LINE ITEM NAME PROGRAMMING ............................................................ Anytime .................................. SET/10 ..................... 98 

NON-TAXABLE AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING ............................................................. FZ ........................................... SET/12 ................... 102 

MINOR GROUP NAME PROGRAMMING ............................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/13 ................... 103 

MAJOR GROUP NAME PROGRAMMING .............................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/14 ................... 104 

CUSTOMER FILE CODE (CHECK TRACK NO.) AND NAME SETTING ................ Anytime .................................. SET/15 ................... 105 

DISPLAY UPPER-ROW MESSAGE PROGRAMMING ........................................... Anytime .................................. SET/17 ................... 107 

COMBINATION REPORT TABLE PROGRAMMING ............................................... Anytime .................................. SET/19 ................... 108 

SALESPERSON CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING .......................................... Anytime .................................. SET/20 ................... 110 

CREDIT CARD COMPANY ID CODE NAME PROGRAMMING ............................. Anytime .................................. SET/21 ................... 112 

ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING ...................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/22 ................... 113 

KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/23 ................... 115 

LINK-PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING ........................................................................ Anytime .................................. SET/25 ................... 115 

TARE TABLE AND GENERAL UNIT WEIGHT SETTING ....................................... Anytime .................................. SET/26 ................... 119 

PLU PRESET-CODE KEY SETTING ....................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/27 ................... 120 

REPORT ITEM PRINT/NON-PRINT SETTING ........................................................ Anytime .................................. SET/28 ................... 122 

PLU GROUP NAME PROGRAMMING .................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/29 ................... 126 

COMMENT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Applicable on V1.9 or after) ................. Anytime .................................. SET/30 ................... 127 

DISPLAY MESSAGE PROGRAMMING .................................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/31 ................... 127 

ERROR MESSAGE PROGRAMMING ..................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/32 ................... 129 

MEDIA PICK-UP WARNING SETTING .................................................................... FZ ........................................... SET/33 ................... 131 

FUNCTION KEY (COMBINATION KEY) SETTING ................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/34 ................... 132 

NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY LIMIT AMOUNT SETTING ........................................... Anytime .................................. SET/35 ................... 133 

DRAWER WARNING TIME SETTING ..................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/38 ................... 134 

READ/RESET REPORT NAME PROGRAMMING .................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/39 ................... 135 

PLU PRICE DOLLAR DISCOUNT/EXTRA CHARGE AMOUNT SETTING (Applicable on V2.0 or after) 

Anytime .................................. SET/40 ................... 138 

AGE LIMIT SETTING (Applicable on V2.0 or after) ................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/41 ................... 138 

FOREIGN CURRENCY ROUNDING PROCESS SETTING, 1-digit type ................ Anytime .................................. SET/48 ................... 140 

FOREIGN CURRENCY ROUNDING PROCESS SETTING, 2-digit type ................ Anytime .................................. SET/49 ................... 141 

CREDIT CARD NO. NEGATIVE CHECK FILE PROGRAMMING ........................... Anytime .................................. SET/54 ................... 135 

BARCODE INDIVIDUAL FLAG TYPE DESIGNATION ............................................ Anytime .................................. SET/55 ................... 138 

PLU ADDITION TO PLU ADDITIONAL TABLE FILE ............................................... Anytime .................................. SET/64 ................... 139 

EFT KEY STATUS SETTING (Applicable on V3.0 or after) ..................................... Anytime .................................. SET/65 ................... 145 

EFT INFORMATION SETTING (Applicable on V3.0 or after) .................................. Anytime .................................. SET/66 ................... 145 

EFT CARD TYPE DESCRIPTOR SETTING (Applicable on V3.0 or after) .............. Anytime .................................. SET/67 ................... 145 

PC TRANSMISSION INFORMATION SETTING ..................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/68 ................... 142 

PLU FILE SEQUENTIAL SORT CHECK .................................................................. Anytime .................................. SET/93 ................... 143 

PLU FILE SEQUENTIAL DELETE ........................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET/94 ................... 143 

DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING .................................. Anytime .................................. SET ........................ 144 

PLU PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING, WHOLE PACKAGE QUANTITY CHANGING 

Anytime .................................. SET ........................ 145 

% + AND % - PRESET RATE SETTING .................................................................. Anytime .................................. SET ........................ 147 

PRESET RATE SETTING FOR SELECTIVE ITEMIZERS ...................................... Anytime .................................. SET ........................ 148 

FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE SETTING ........................................... Anytime .................................. SET ........................ 150 

TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING ................................................................................. FZ ........................................... SET ........................ 152 

GST RATE SETTING ............................................................................................... FZ ........................................... SET ........................ 155 

STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING .......................................................................... Anytime .................................. SET ........................ 156

- 20 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: TC = After Table Clear DGZ = After Department GT Reset PGZ = After PLU GT Reset 

FZ = After Financial Daily Reset HZ = After Hourly Range Reset All Resets = After Daily and GT Reset 

FGZ = After Financial GT Reset CZ = After Cashier Reset Anytime = Any time outside a sale 

DZ = After Department Daily Reset PZ = After PLU Reset (no conditions required) 

BASIC KEY FUNCTIONS AND KEYBOARD VARIATIONS IN 

PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS 

Basic Key Functions 

1. The following are main keys and their functions to be used in programming operations: 

[X] or [@/FOR] .............. Used to enter the program Submode No. The [X] key is usually labeled as [@/ 

FOR] on the ECR keyboard. 

[ST] ................................ Used to enter the Address No. or Item Code. Also used to end the item data 

entries. 

[#] .................................. Used to enter data for the address or item. Each character code is also entered 

through this key. 

[AT/TL] .......................... Used to end the entire program Submode sequence. 

2. Functions of the [C] key: 

• When an entered program data is already printed, the [C] key cannot clear it any longer. To correct the 

data, re-enter it. 

• Before the entered data is printed, the data may be cleared by the [C] key (except in the SFKC 

PROGRAMMING OPERATION). 

Keyboard Variations in Programming operations 

The MA-1650 provides several keyboards for programming operations. Depending on which keyboard is 

used, the key layout and the character entry method will vary. 

Case 1: When the ECR Keyboard is Ordinary Keyboard Type (Stroke-key Type): 

1-1 When the Ordinary keyboard alone is used for programming, follow the instructions as they are 

described in this manual. For character settings, use the CHARACTER CODE TABLE (later stated). 

None of the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY methods are possible. 

1-2 When the Programming Keyboard TKB-1 (hardware option) is connected: 

1) Character Keys provided on the TKB-1 keyboard may be used to directly enter the characters. 

(DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method). Any characters not provided on the TKB-1 keyboard (and 

those provided as well) may be entered through the Numeric Keys and the [#] key on the ECR 

keyboard, referring to the CHARACTER CODE TABLE. 

2) Basic Function Keys ([C], [X], [ST], [AT/TL]) may be depressed either on the TKB-1 or the ECR 

keyboard. If any other keys not provided on the TKB-1 are required in programming, operate them 

on the ECR keyboard (such as Department Keys, [DP#], [PLU], etc.).

- 21 - 

EO3-11070 


1-3 When the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected: 

1) Character Keys provided on the PK-2 Character Setting Sheet may be used to directly enter the 

characters (DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method). Any characters not provided there (and those 

provided as well) may be entered, in the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method, through the Numeric 

Keys and the [#] key on the ECR keyboard. 

2) All Function keys ([C], [X], [ST], [AT/TL], [DP#], etc.) must be operated on the ECR keyboard. 

3) In the following operations, however, the Character Setting Sheet should be removed and the keys 

on the PK-2 are used as PLU Preset-code Keys: 

• PLU PRESET-CODE KEY SETTING (Submode 27 in this chapter) 

Case 2: When the ECR Keyboard is Flat Keyboard Type: 

The Flat Keyboard will be set with the “Setting Mode Key Layout” in the programming operations including 

character entries. On this keyboard, functions and locations of keys required in various programming 

operations are fixed. Characters on the key sheet can be entered directly through this keyboard. The 

Character Code Entry method is also allowed. 

NOTES: 1. If an option keyboard (TKB-1 or PK-2) is connected, the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY 

method is allowed through both the ECR keyboard and the option keyboard. 

2. Whether the “REG” mode key layout or the “Setting Mode Key Layout” will be active is 

determined by the Mode Lock position and the Submode No. entry through the [X] key (which 

is usually labeled as [@/FOR]). Therefore, the programming Submode No. and the [X] key 

depression must be operated in the “REG” mode key layout. That is, if the locations of the [X] 

key in the “REG” mode key layout are different from those in the “Setting Mode Key Layout”, 

key-ins up to the Submode No. and the depression of the [X] key must be operated on 

the“REG” mode key layout, and then the “Setting Mode Key Layout” sheet should be inserted.

CHARACTER ENTRIES 

- 22 - 

EO3-11070 


As already stated, there are two methods of operations for character settings for names or messages: 

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method. 

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method 

This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key. This method is 

allowed in either of Case 1 and Case 2, but is operated only on the ECR keyboard (Ordinary Type or Flat Type). 

DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method 

This method is to set a character by directly depressing the Character Key on any of the following keyboard: 

• Flat Keyboard (ECR Keyboard Flat Type) with “Setting Mode Key Layout” sheet (refer to Case 2) 

• TKB-1 Keyboard (Programming Keyboard; hardware option) 

• PK-2 Keyboard (PLU Keyboard; hardware option) 

By using those character keys, the characters are directly entered. In this manual, sample operations are 

attached to most of the programming operations. And at name or message programming portions, characters 

are entered by the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method. Instead of this, you may depress the Character Keys. 

For example, instead of entering 401 [#] (to enter character “A”), you may simply depress Character Key “A” 

on any of the above three keyboards. 

On the following pages, Character Code Tables under the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and three 

different keyboards under the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method are shown. These pages are to be 

referred to, every time the “Character Entries” sequence is contained in various programming operations in 

this manual. 

Read through these pages at least once first, so that you may know the appropriate method of character entries 

using the ECR keyboard and/or option keyboards.

Character Code Entry Method 

Character Code Table 1: Standard Characters 

- 23 - 

EO3-11070 


Character Setting Operations: 

- 24 - 

EO3-11070 


• To set a regular-sized character, enter the COL (column) code and then the ROW code, followed by the 

[#] key. 

ex.) To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#]. 

To set “kg”, enter 1508, and depress [#]. 

• To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior code entry, or enter 200 and depress 

[#]. 

• Depress the [X] (or [@/FOR]) key once prior to a regular-sized character entry, and it will be a double-sized 

character (a blank will also be double-sized). 

ex.) To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized: 

[X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#] 

G R O U P 

• Depress the [X] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line or enter name 

with all double-sized characters. 

ex.) To set “GROUP” all in double-sized: 

[X] [X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#] 

G R O U P 

All Double-sized Declaration

Direct Character Entry Method 

Using Flat Keyboard (installed as the ECR Main Keyboard): 

-- Setting Mode Key Layout -- 

- 25 - 

EO3-11070 


(Use the special template for this purpose and insert it between the film layers covering the Flat Keyboard. This 

key layout is applicable to only certain submodes.) 

Character Keys: Simply depress the key to enter the character. (The [#] key should not follow.) The 

numerics 1 to 0 are entered as characters 1 to 0 but not as codes for PLU Item Codes, etc. 

The One Double-size Declaration (by depressing [X] key once prior to the required 

character) and the All Double-size Declaration (by depressing [X] twice before the 

characters) are the same as in the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method. 

Function Keys: These are function keys to be used in programming operations with the Setting Mode Key 

Layout. The Numeric Keys here are used to enter PLU Codes, etc. or numeric values as 

program data, but not to enter the numerics as characters. 

(Also, refer to “Case 2: When the ECR Keyboard is Flat Keyboard Type” already stated.)

Using TKB-1 (Programming Keyboard; hardware option) 

- 26 - 

EO3-11070 


Shift Keys (1 to 4), Shift Lock Key 

Used to designate the shift of the character keys. Each character has three different characters, each of which 

is designated by the Shift Key 1 to Shift Key 3. (The Shift Key 4 is not used for the MA-1650 series models.) 

Shift Key 2 and Shift Key 3 are effective for one following character only. After that, the Shift 1 mode is 

automatically regained. 

The Shift Lock Key is used to hold the shifted status for a series of characters. To change the shifted status 

locked by the Shift Lock Key, one of the Shift Keys (1 to 3) must be pressed prior to the character key 

depression. 

Character Keys 

Used to enter alpha/numerics as characters. In setting a name or message, simply depress the corresponding 

character key here, instead of a character code and the [#] key combination on the ECR keyboard. 

ex.) 

A ä “A” is entered in the Shift 1 mode. 

Operate: ([SFT1]) ➤ [A ä] 

“a” is entered in the Shift 2 mode. 

Operate: [SFT2] ➤ [A ä] 

“ä” is entered in the Shift 3 mode. 

Operate: [SFT3] ➤ 

[A ä] 

The numeric keys [1] through [0] (on the second row from the top) are used as character keys (i.e. the entered 

number will be part of the name or message to be printed). 

Also note that those numeric keys may be entered in the Shift 1, 2, or 3 mode.

Function Keys 

- 27 - 

EO3-11070 


Except for the [CODE] key, each of the function keys corresponds to the identical key installed on the ECR 

keyboard as to the function in programming operations. ([CLEAR] = [C], [X] = [@/FOR]) 

The [CODE] key cannot be used for the MA-1650 series ECRs. 

Operation Examples 

To set the Menu Item name “COFFEE” for Dept. 2: 

ON ECR KEYBOARD ONLY 

3 [#] [DEPT 2] 2 [#] 403 [#] 415 [#] 406 [#] 405 [#] 405 [#] 405 [#] [ST] 

C O F F E E 

[AT/TL] 

USING TKB-1 KEYBOARD 

3 [X] [DEPT 2] 2 [ST] 

on ECR 

➤ 

C O F F E E [ST] [AT/TL] 

on TKB-1 on ECR or TKB-1 

The “One Double-size Declaration” (by depression [X] once prior to the required character) and the “All 

Double-size Declaration” (by depressing [X] twice before the entire descriptor) are the same as in setting 

characters on the ECR keyboard. 

Any characters not listed on the TKB-1 keyboard may be entered by the code entry method on the ECR 

keyboard.

- 28 - 

EO3-11070 


Using PK-2 (PLU Keyboard; hardware option) 

The PK-2 is used to enter a required PLU code by simply depressing the code-preset key on the PK-2 

keyboard in the REG or MGR mode. In addition, the PK-2 can be used to enter characters directly during 

the programming operations that require character settings, such as STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND 

COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING, DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING, etc. 

The figure below shows the key indications of the PK-2 keyboard for the character setting purpose. Insert 

the template for this purpose between the film layers that cover the PK-2 keyboard. 

Instead of entering a 3- or 4 digit character code and depressing the [#] key on the ECR keyboard, a simple 

depression of the appropriate key on the PK-2 keyboard will be the character entry. 

Unlike the TKB-1, all the function keys, such as [X], [ST], [#]. [AT/TL], etc. must be operated on the ECR 

side. Any characters not listed on the template may be entered by the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method 

on the ECR keyboard (the characters even listed on the template may be entered as well by that method). 

Please note also that the keys “0” to “9” in the figure below function as character keys but do not function 

for code entries. Any code entries, for Menu Item Codes, Address Nos, etc. must be entered through the 

Numeric Keys on the ECR keyboard. 

The One Double-size Declaration (by depressing the [X] key once prior to the required character) and the 

All Double-sized Declaration (by depressing [X] twice before all the characters) are the same as in the 

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method.

CONDITION REQUIRED FOR PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS 

- 29 - 

EO3-11070 


At the top of each programming operation a “CONDITION” is given. Unless the register satisfies this condition, 

the programming operations will not be allowed. 

There are two types of conditions: 

“Any time outside a sale” 

It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any other sale 

entry. 

“After ... Reset” 

It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation. And 

an error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words “After ... Reset” 

do not necessarily mean “immediately after ...”. 

When the designated reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in the 

SET, X, or Z mode, the condition “After ... Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation is still 

allowed. 

On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating to that 

report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or - mode, the programming operation will no longer 

be allowed and the same reset report must be taken. 

Thus the condition “After ... Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must be zero 

(except non-resettable memory data). Because of this “CONDITION” requirement, the report data will be 

protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting of the report to 

another resetting of the same report next time.

SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) PROGRAMMING 

- 30 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation is to determine the keyboard layout with the required keys and must be carried out first before any 

other programming operation. If a RAM CLEAR has been operated prior to the SFKC programming, program only 

the keys that require changes from the SFKC in the Standard Keyboard which has automatically been set by the 

RAM Clear operation. (Standard Keyboards on pages 34 and 35) 

The following keys that are minimum requirements for programming and registering operations must be installed 

on the keyboard no matter what other keys may or may not be installed: 

[C], [X] (or [@/FOR]), [ST], [AT/TL], [#], and Department Keys or [DP#] 

CONDITION After all Z & GTZ reports, or after RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, or STATUS CLEAR 

OPERATION Mode Lock: BLIND 

1. Enter 76, and depress the key to be [AT/TL] (Cash Media key). This declares the SFKC Programming Start 

and at the same time sets the SFKC 76 on the key. From this step on, the depressed key will be [AT/TL]. 

2. Enter the SFKC (see the SFKC table on the following page), and depress the key that require the key name 

of that SFKC. Repeat this step until all the required keys are set with their own SFKC’s. Each key on the 

keyboard must correspond to one SFKC, except for SFKC 96 (PLU Preset-code Keys). If in this step, a 

key is simply depressed without a prior SFKC entry, the SFKC that has been pre-programmed on that key 

is displayed at the AMOUNT portion. 

NOTES: 1) The entered SFKC is displayed at the AMOUNT portion of the display. 

2) If a wrong code has been entered and the key has also been depressed (i.e. a wrong SFKC 

has been set on a key), enter the correct SFKC and depress the key. The code entered last 

will be effective. 

3) If “0” is entered as SFKC, the key will be dead and its memory will also be closed. 

4) Each of the keys programmed in this step will have its memory (if any) opened automatically. 

5) The [C] key, if once set with SFKC 95, may be used to clear an error, but not to clear and SFKC 

entry. If any SFKC is entered and the [C] key is depressed, that SFKC will be set on the key 

that was once the [C] key. 

6) To designate the SFKC 100 for the [TAX] key (Manual Tax), operate the keys [1] → [0] → [0]. 

In this case, the [00] key is unavailable. 

3. Depress the [AT/TL] key (the key set as [AT/TL] in Step 1) to end the SFKC programming operation. The 

display now shows “0” at the AMOUNT portion. A receipt is issued.

SFKC PROGRAMMING OPERATION FLOW 

Mode Lock: BLIND ➤ 76 [AT/TL] ➤ ISFKCI ➤ [KEY] ➤ [AT/TL] 

SFKC KEY NAME MEMORY TO BE OPENED (REMARKS) 

0 dead-key code (used to close the key and memory) 

1 to 60 Department Preset-code Keys 1 to 60 Respective Department memory 

61 RF (Receipt Feed) No memory 

62 JF (Journal Feed) No memory 

63 00 (Double-zero) No memory 

64 000 (Triple-zero) No memory 

65 • (Decimal Point) No memory 

66 VND CPN (Vendor Coupon) Vendor Coupon 

67 STR CPN (Store Coupon) Store Coupon 

68 BTL RTN (Bottle Return) Bottle Return 

69 DOLL DISC (Dollar Discount) Dollar Discount 

70 % I (%+ or %-) %I 

71 % II (%+ or %-) %II 

72 RTN MDSE (Returned Merchandise) Returned Merchandise 

73 ITEM CORR (Item Correct) Item Corr, Misc. Void 

74 VOID (Void) Void, Misc. Void 

75 ALL VOID (All Void) All Void 

76 AT/TL (Cash Amount Tender/Total) 

-- Cash Media 

Cash Sales, Cash-in-drawer, 

77 CHK TND (Check Tender) Check Sales, Check-in-drawer, 

78 Chg (Charge Total) Charge Sales, Charge-in-drawer, 

79 MISC TEND (Miscellaneous Tender) Misc. Sales, Misc.-in-drawer, 

80 CREDIT 1 (Credit 1); Available for V3.0 or after Credit 1 Sales, Credit 1-in-drawer 

81 CREDIT 1 (Credit 2); Available for V3.0 or after Credit 2 Sales, Credit 2-in-drawer 

82 ST (Subtotal) No memory 

83 R/A (Received-on-Account) Received-on-Account 

84 PO (Paid-Out) Paid Out 

85 NS (No-sale) No-sale Counter 

➤ 

SFKC TABLE 

- 31 - 

to read preset SFKC 

-- Continued on next page -- 

➤ 

Repeat 

The key that 

requires the 

function of 

the SFKC. 

EO3-11070 


SFKC TABLE (continued) 

SFKC KEYNAME MEMORY TO BE OPENED (REMARKS) 

- 32 - 

EO3-11070 


86 PR OPEN (Preset Open) No memory 

87 LC OPEN (Listing Capacity Open) No memory 

88 OPEN (PR/LC Open) No memory 

89 VALIDATE (Validation) Validation Counter 

90 # (Non-add Number) No memory 

91 -- vacant -- 

92 PLU (Price-Look-Up) (To open memory, each PLU program is further 

necessary; however, if this key is closed, 

the memory for all PLUs are closed.) 

93 X or @/FOR (Quantity Extension) No memory 

94 RECEIPT ISSUE (Receipt Post-issue) No memory 

95 C (Clear) No memory 

96 PLU Preset-code Keys No memory 

97 TX1/M, or TX/M (Tax 1 Modifier) Tax 1, Taxable Total 1, Negative Tax 

98 TX2/M (Tax 2 Modifier) Tax 2, Taxable total 2 

99 TXBL TL (Taxable Total) No memory 

100 TAX (Manual Tax) Tax 5 (Manual Tax Memory) 

101 EX (Tax Exempt) Exempt Customer, Exempt 1, 2, 3, 4 

102 PB+ (Previous Balance Transfer, Previous Balance Sales, Previous 

+; for Manual PB Entry Type), or 

PICK UP BAL (Pick Up Balance; 

for Check Track option) 

Balance R/A, Previous Balance PO 

103 PB- (Previous Balance -: 

for Manual PB Entry Type), or 

CODE OPEN (Code Open; 

for Check Track option) 

No memory 

104 TRF (Transfer) No memory 

105 SI1/M (Selective Itemizer 1 Modifier) No memory 

106 SI1/TL (SI 1 Total) SI 1 Total 

107 SI2/TL (SI 2 Total) SI 2 Total 

108 AMT (Amount) No memory 

109 RPT (Repeat) No memory 

110 SCALE (Scale) No memory 

111 TARE (Tare No.) No memory 

112 -- vacant -- 

113 SI2/M (Selective Itemizer 2 Modifier) No memory 

114 CARD No. (Card No.) Credit Card Companies 1 to 12 

115 FS/M (Food Stamp Modifier), or 

GST/M (GST Modifier) 

No memory 

116 TX3/M (Tax 3 Modifier) Tax 3, Taxable Total 3 

-- Continued on next page --



117 to 

119 

-- vacant -- 

120 FSTL TEND (Food Stamp Total/Tender) Food Stamp Total, Food Stamp-in-drawer, 

Food Stamp Change 

121 CUR 1 (Foreign Currency 1) Foreign Currency 1-in-drawer 





126 DEBIT (Debit); Available for V3.0 or after Debit Sales, Debit-in-drawer 

127 EBT CASH (EBT Cash); Available for V3.0 or after EBT Cash Sales, EBT Cash-in-drawer 

128 EBT F/S (EBT Food Stamp); Available for V3.0 or after EBT F/S Sales, EBT F/S-in-drawer 

129 -- vacant -- 

130 LOG/RECEIPT (Log/Receipt) No memory 

131 LOG (Log) No memory 

132 SALES PERSON (Salesperson) No memory 

133 CHK NO (Check No. Print) No memory 

134 TX4/M (Tax 4 Modifier) Tax 4, Taxable Total 4 

135 DP# (Department No.) No memory 

136 CARD CHK (Card No. Check) No memory 

137 PLU ADD (PLU Add) No memory 

138 RTR Available for Master Terminal only 

139 RECEIPT No memory 

140 -- vacant -- 

141 COMMENT (Comment) No memory (Available for V1.9 or after) 

142 -- vacant -- 

143 to CLK1 (Cashier 1) to No memory 

150 CLK8 (Cashier 8) 

151 to FUNCTION 1 (Function 1) to No memory 

160 FUNCTION 10 (Function 10) 

161 HOLD/RECALL (Hold/Recall) Hold Counter 

162 to 

169 

-- vacant -- 

170 3rd PRICE (3rd Price) No memory (Available for V2.0 or after) 

171 to 

184 

-- vacant -- 

185 READ (PLU Price Read) No memory 

186 TARE 2 (Tare 2) No memory 

187 PRINT (Print) No memory 

188 TARE 3 (Tare 3) No memory 

189 DISPLAY 1 (Display 1) No memory (Available for V1.9 or after) 


- 33 - 

EO3-11070 









195 PACK (Pack) No memory (Available for V2.0 or after) 

196 ID (Identification) No memory (Available for V2.0 or after) 

197 MANUAL CARD # (Manual Card No.) No memory (Available for V3.0 or after) 

198 OFFLINE AUTH (Off-line Auth) No memory (Available for V3.0 or after) 

199 STORE RECEIPT (Store Receipt) No memory (Available for V3.0 or after) 

- 34 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. For further descriptions of each key, refer to the chapter “FUNCTION OF EACH KEY” in the 

OPERATOR’S GUIDE of the Owner’s Manual for MA-1650. 

2. On V3.0 or after, the keys installable are changed as follows. 


• Media-coupon (SFKC 80) Credit 1 

• Credit 1 (SFKC 81) Credit 2 

• Credit 2 (SFKC 126) Debit 

• Credit 3 (SFKC 127) EBT Cash 

• Credit 4 (SFKC 128) EBT F/S 

Hardware Key Code 

(indicating the absolute location on the keyboard) 

Compare the original SFKC and the new SFKC 

for each key. Or verify the key layout by reading 

the SFKC in the display during the SFKC PRO- 

GRAMMING operation (by simply depressing the 

required key.) 

LOG 

RECEIPT 

SALES 

PERSON 

LC 

OPEN 

RTN 

MDSE 

VOID 

ITEM 

CORR 

FS/M 

FS/M 

@/FOR 

AMT 

PLU 

.... 

SFKC Receipt Sample 

P76 

#066 076→ 145 

➤ 

STANDARD KEYBOARD 1 (auto-set by RAM CLEAR on V1.8 or before) 

➤ 

-- Ordinary Keyboard Type -- 

HOLD 

RECALL # RF JF 

1 

C TX/M 

2 

7 8 9 

3 

4 5 6 

4 

1 2 3 

5 

0 00 • 

ST 

➤ 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

TXBL 

TL 

11 

12 

13 

14 

New SFKC that has been set in this SFKC 

operation. The SFKC “000” indicates that the key 

is closed (SFKC = 0) 

Original SFKC (for the first SFKC operation, it will 

be the SFKC auto-set by the last RAM clear). 

15 

AT/TL 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

CHK 

TND 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

Chg 

VALI 

DATE 

CARD 

No. 

VND 

CPN 

STR 

CPN 

SI/TL 

FSTL 

TEND 

NS 

ALL 

VOID 

DOLL 

DISC 

%- 

EX 

MISC

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

STANDARD KEYBOARD 2 (auto-set by RAM CLEAR on V1.8 or before) 

PLU Preset-code keys 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

-- Flat Keyboard Type -- 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

Department keys 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

LOG 

RECEIPT 

PB+ 

LC 

OPEN 

AMT 

PLU 

- 35 - 

HOLD 

RECALL 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE 

NS 

PB- TX/M FS/M 

7 

4 

1 

0 

C 

8 

5 

2 

00 

9 

6 

3 

• 

7 

4 

1 

0 

8 

5 

2 

00 

ALL 

VOID 

ITEM 

CORR 

TXBL 

TL 

ST 

9 

6 

3 

• 

VALI 

DATE 

VOID 

@/FOR # %- 

DOLL 

DISC 

VND 

CPN 

STR 

CPN 

RTN 

MDSE 

EO3-11070 


RF JF 

R/A PO 

Chg 

FSTL 

TEND 

MISC 

TEND 

CHECK 

TEND 

AT/TL 

TRF

LOG 

RECEIPT 

SALES 

PERSON 

LC 

OPEN 

RTN 

MDSE 

VOID 

ITEM 

CORR 

SI/M 

FS/M 

@/FOR 

AMT 

PLU 

STANDARD KEYBOARD 3 (auto-set by RAM CLEAR on V1.9 or after) 

-- Ordinary Keyboard Type -- 

HOLD 

RECALL # RF JF PRINT 

1 

VALI 

DATE 

CARD 

No. 

VND 

CPN 

STR 

CPN 

C TX/M COMMENT 

2 

7 8 9 # 

3 

4 5 6 Chg 

4 

1 2 3 

CARD 

No. 5 

0 00 • 

FSTL 

TEND 

ST 

- 36 - 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

TXBL 

TL 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

AT/TL 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

CHK 

TND 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

Chg 

EO3-11070 


VALI 

DATE 

CARD 

No. 

VND 

CPN 

STR 

CPN 

SI/TL 

FSTL 

TEND 

NS 

ALL 

VOID 

DOLL 

DISC 

NOTE: The keys enclosed with a bold line are used for the EBT (Electronic Benefit Transfer) feature, and usually 

covered with the blind plates. They are automatically operated by the ET Board during the EBT process. 

Therefore, location change of them are prohibited. 

%- 

EX 

MISC

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

STANDARD KEYBOARD 4 (auto-set by RAM CLEAR on V1.9 or after) 

PLU Preset-code keys 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

-- Flat Keyboard Type -- 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

Department keys 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

LOG 

RECEIPT 

PRINT 

PB+ 

LC 

OPEN 

AMT 

COMMENT 

PLU 

- 37 - 

HOLD 

RECALL 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE 

NS 

PB- TX/M FS/M 

# 

7 

4 

1 

0 

C 

8 

5 

2 

00 

9 

6 

3 

• 

7 

4 

1 

0 

8 

5 

2 

00 

ALL 

VOID 

ITEM 

CORR 

Chg 

TXBL 

TL 

CARD 

No. 

ST 

9 

6 

3 

• 

VALI 

DATE 

VOID 

@/FOR # %- 

DOLL 

DISC 

VND 

CPN 

STR 

CPN 

RTN 

MDSE 

FSTL 

TEND 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE 

CREDIT 

2 

CREDIT 

1 

EO3-11070 


RF JF 

R/A PO 

Chg 

TRF 

FSTL 

TEND 

MISC 

TEND 

CHK 

TND 

AT/TL 

NOTE: The keys enclosed with a bold line are used for the EBT (Electronic Benefit Transfer) feature, and they 

are automatically operated by the ET Board during the EBT process. Therefore, location change of them 

are prohibited.

RAM ALLOCATION SETTING (Submode 79) 

- 38 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode sets the capacity of the Expansion Memory, the number of cashiers, the number of PLUs, the 

number of check tracks (customer files), the number of data capture records, and the number of Negative Cards 

to be checked. 

CONDITION After a Table Clear or a RAM Clear 

(Surely execute RAM Clear when changing the M/S system to the standalone system, 

changing the expansion memory capacity, and changing the system setting.) 


Code to designate Code to designate 

79 [X] ➤ 0 [#] ➤ Expansion Memory [#] ➤ System Setting [#] 

Capacity 

Max. 4 digits 

1 digit (0 to 5) 

(combination of 1, 2, 3, and 4) 

(See *below.) 

(See **below.) 

..... 

Stand-alone 

designation 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ | Number of Cashiers | ➤ [ST] 


➤ 

➤ | Number of PLUs | ➤ [ST] 


➤ 

➤ | Number of Check Tracks | ➤ [ST] 


➤ 

➤ | Number of Data Capture Records | ➤ [ST] 


➤ | Number of Negative Card Nos | ➤ [ST] 


(See *** for 

the value of 

each item.) 

Depressing the [ST] key without a numeric value 

[AT/TL] entry will set the value currently displayed. (The 

value displayed indicates the programmable 

maximum number of each item for the 

unallocated area in the RAM.) 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤

* Code to designate Expansion Memory Capacity: 

0: No Expansion Memory (i.e. with Standard Memory only) 

1: 512KB 

2: 1MB 

3: 2MB 

4: 3MB 

5: 4MB 

- 39 - 

EO3-11070 


** Codes to designate System Setting (Combine the following four codes in a maximum of 4 digits. For example, 

enter 12 to designate 1 and 2.): 

1: Cashier Expansion Memory is used. 

2: PLU Expansion Memory is used. 

3: Check Track Expansion Memory is used. 

4: CVS Spec. is used. 

NOTES: 1. When no expansion memory is used, designation of the system setting is unavailable. 

2. To use the CVS spec., the expansion memory of 2MB or more is necessary. Furthermore, when 

the system setting code 4 (CVS spec.) is selected, all other system setting codes (1 to 3) are 

forcibly programmed. 

*** Values to be set for the Number of Cashiers, the Number of PLUs, the Number of Check Tracks, the Number 

of Data Capture Records, and the Number of Negative Card Nos.: 

Item Default Value Value range when Value range when 

(Number of:) (auto-set after a Standard Memory is Expansion Memory 

RAM Clear) used is used 

Cashiers 15 1 to 15 1 to 99 

PLUs 900 0 to 1,500 0 to 65,000 

(NOTE 6 below) 

Check Tracks 500 0 to 1,000 0 to 3,000 

Data Capture 

Records 

0 0 0 to 65,000 

Negative Check 

Card Nos. 

0 0 0 to 3,000 

No setting for the Number of “Data Capture Records” and “Negative Check Card nos.” will be possible unless the 

Expansion Memory is used. 

NOTES: 1. The minimum unit for setting the number of PLUs, Check Tracks, or Data Capture Records or 

Negative Check nos. is 100. 

2. Even when a large area remains to be unallocated in the RAM, setting of any item cannot exceed 

its value range specified in the table above. 

3. When any of the values already set are to be changed even during the entire setting operation 

sequence, complete the submode first by depressing the [AT/TL] key, then start the submode 

again from the first after executing the Table Clear or the RAM Clear. 

4. The Expansion Memory capacity must match the installed RAM capacity. When Check Tracks, 

Data Capturing, or Negative of Card Nos is used, select the corresponding System Option 

settings. 

5. When using the Cashier Expansion memory, select the Code Entry Method. 

6. For a system with the CVS spec. selected, value range with expansion memory used is 0 to 

30,000.

Setting Example) 

To allocate the RAM as in the following: 

Expansion Memory: 4MB (Code 5) 

System Setting: System Setting Codes 1 to 3 are used. 

Number of Cashiers: 4 cashiers 

Number of PLUs: 4,000 PLUs 

Number of Check Tracks: 2,000 tracks (customer files) 

Number of Data Capture Records: 1,000 records 

Number of Negative Card Nos.: 1,000 records 

Mode Lock: BLIND, 

79 [X] 0 [#] 5 [#] 123 [#] 

4 [ST] 

4000 [ST] 

2000 [ST] 

1000 [ST] 

1000 [ST] 

[AT/TL] 

TABLE CLEAR (Submode 91) 

➤ 

91 [X] [AT/TL] 

- 40 - 

P79 

0 

5 

123 

#1 4 

#2 4000 

#3 2000 

#4 1000 

#5 1000 

P91 

TABLE CLEAR 

0070 13:54TM 

0006 13:54TM 

EO3-11070 


This operation is used to clear all the programmed data and sales data of the RAM Allocation area (Cashiers, 

PLUs, Check Tracks, Data Capture Records, and Negative Check Card No.) at a time. 

CONDITION Any time outside a sale 


NOTES: 1. After a Table Clear operation, the RAM Allocation Setting (Submode 79) will be allowed. 

2. The default values of RAM Allocation are auto-set after a Table Clear operation.

SYSTEM OPTION PROGRAMMING (Submode 11 or 18) 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

OPERATION For User System Options: 

(Address No. 1 to No. 10) 

Mode Lock: SET 11 [X] 

For Dealer System Options: 


Mode Lock: SET 18 [X] 

For Dealer System Options: 


Mode Lock: BLIND 18 [X] 

➤ 

➤ 

Repeat for another Address No. 

| Address No. | [ST] ➤ | Bit Nos for “SET” | [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

- 41 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation is used to set the ECR’s basic features and selective functions to meet the requirements of the 

market and your user. 

CONDITION After Financial Daily Reset 

Enter a maximum of eight-digit number composed of Bit Nos whose status must be selected to the “SET” status 

in the Address. 

ex.) To set Bit No. 2 only ............................... Enter 2. 

To set Bits No. 2 and No. 3 .................... Enter 23. 

To set all the Bit Nos .............................. Enter 12345678 

To reset all the Bit Nos ........................... Enter 0. 

NOTES 1. Any bit No. with the “--vacant--” item will be disregarded even if it is set. (However, if even set, 

it will not result in an error.) 

2. When a RAM Clear is completed, the status of each Bit No. is automatically set to the side marked 

with an asterisk in the STANDARD STATUS column of each SYSTEM OPTION TABLE shown 

on the following pages. Therefore, only the Bit status changes of the required Addresses may 

be entered according to your customer’s requirements. 

ex.) To set Address No. 1 with the following requirements: 

(Refer to the Address No. 1 table on the next page.) 

Bit No. 1: Time NON-PRINT (SET status) 

Bit No. 4: Taxable Total NON-PRINT (SET status) 

Other bits will be selected to “RESET” status. 

Mode Lock to SET, enter 11, depress [X]. 

Enter 1 (Address No.), depress [ST]. 

Enter 14 (Bit Nos for SET), depress [#]. 

Depress [AT/TL] to end. 

11-14-1994 MON #0 

P11 

#01 14 

0006

ADDRESS No. CONTENTS 

SYSTEM OPTION TABLE 

BIT ITEM SELECTIVE STATUS STANDARD REMARKS 

No. STATUS 

1 

Time (on Sale Receipt, 

Report, Program Receipt) 

RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

1 NON-PRINT OPTION I 

Sale Item Count on each 

Sale Receipt 

Subtotal Amount print by 

[ST] key on Receipt and 

Journal 

Taxable Total Amount 

Print by [TXBL TL] key on 

Receipt and Journal 

Customer Count for each 

Department on Department 

Reports 

Sales % of each 

Department and Group, on 

Department and Group 

Reports (NOTE) 

-- vacant -- 

Salesperson on Sale 

Receipt and Remote Slip 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT 

NON-PRINT * 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

- 42 - 

EO3-11070 


Standard Bit Set (auto-set by RAM Clear) 

4 

➤ 

That Department 

NOTE: • The sale % of a department: 

• 

Sum of Positive Departments 

(When the “Sum of Positive Departments” is zero or negative, the sale % of 0% will be printed.) 

The sale % of an Other Income department and a Negative status department is not printed. 

* 

Both Bit 5 & Bit 6 RESET: 

Prints sales % of each 

Department and 

Group.




No. STATUS 

1 

Discount/% Discount 

Memory of Department 

Report 

RESET 

SET 

PRINT 

NON-PRINT * 

NOTE below 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

2 NON-PRINT OPTION II 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

- 43 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

1 

This bit must always 

be RESET 

NOTE: Selection of printing Discount/% Discount, Returned Merchandise, Store Coupon, Item Correct, Void, 

REG Minus 

SET: Non-print 

RESET:Print (However, memory for which the non-print is selected in Report Item Print/Non-print 

Setting (Submode 28) is not printed.)


3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

3 OPTIONAL FUNCTION I 

[TXBL TL] key before 

finalizing a sale 

Credit Balance in REG 

mode 

Drawer Opening on taking 

Financial Reports 

Split Package Pricing 

Fraction Round-up Method 

Manager Intervention for 

entering Negative Departments/PLUs 

in REG mode 


finalizing Negative-balance 

Sales in REG mode 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


NOT COMPULSORY * 

COMPULSORY 

PROHIBITED * 

ALLOWED 

OPEN * 

NOT OPEN 

ROUND UP PRODUCT * 

ROUND UP UNIT PRICE 

NOT REQUIRED * 

REQUIRED 


REQUIRED 

- 44 - 

EO3-11070 



0 

➤ 


No. STATUS 

1 

2 

Fraction Rounding 

ROUND UP 

Fraction Rounding DIS- 

CARD 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

Follow Bit 2 status. 

ROUND UP 

ROUND OFF 

* 

* 

If both RESET, it will be 

ROUND OFF. 

(If both SET, it will be 

DISCARD.) 

See also NOTE 1 below. 

SET DISCARD 

See NOTE 2 below. 


except when finalized 

by [AT/TL] 

NOTE 1: The selective status of the fraction rounding here applies to quantity extension, %+, and %- calculations. The fraction resulted 

from any tax % calculations or selective itemizer % calculations will be ROUNDED OFF (no alternative rounding method is 

provided). For fraction rounding of scale entry calculations, selections are provided in Address 35. 

NOTE 2: The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DOLL DISC], [VOID], [STR CPN], [VND CPN], [BTL RTN] will result 

in over-subtraction of the subtotal amount the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status SET (ALLOWED) is selected, 

over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the REG mode. The [RTN MDSE] key and negative departments/PLUs are 

not subject to this “Credit Balance” status selection. The Credit Balance is always allowed in the MGR or - mode. 

NOTE 3: Example) When the price of a whole package is $1.00 which contains 3 tomatoes, a customer buys 2 tomatoes: 

ROUND UP PRODUCT: $1.00 x 2/3 = $0.6666 ... → round up to $0.67 

ROUND UP UNIT PRICE: $1.00 x 1/3 = $0.3333 ... → 2 x $0.34 (rounded-up price of 1 tomato) = $0.68 

The two methods of calculation above are applicable to the portion of split items within one whole package. When Split Package 

Pricing is operated on items exceeding one package portion, the portion of the whole package will be calculated as one whole 

package and the rest items exceeding the whole package portion will be subject to whichever of the two methods above.


3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

4 OPTIONAL FUNCTION II 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


- 45 - 

EO3-11070 



23 

➤ 


No. STATUS 

1 

Zero-skip in All Department 

and Department 

Group Reports 

RESET 

SET 

Print all Departments data 

Zero-skip 

* 

Departments/Groups 

with no sales will be 

skipped in the report. 

2 

Zero-skip in PLU Reports 

RESET Print all PLUs data 

SET Zero-skip * 

Zero-skip on Financial and 

Cashier Reports 

-- vacant -- 

Cashier No. Display on 

Operator Display 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Print all items data 

Zero-skip * 

Not display * 

Display 

* 

* 

* 

* 

See NOTE below. 

NOTE: If SET, the Cashier No. of the signed-ON cashier is always displayed. It will be displayed on the 

Department Code position (2 digits). This bit must be SET in case the Cashier Key is programmed by 

SFKC programming for the convenience of operation.


5 

6 

7 

8 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


5 SELECTIVE ITEMIZER CONTROL 

SI2 Total Amount on 

Receipt and Remote slip 

on [SI2/TL] Depression 

[SI2/TL] Key before 


SI2 Function as Special 

Discount (%- function) 


Charge (%+ function) 

PRINT (and DISPLAY) 

NON-PRINT * 

(DISPLAY only) 


COMPULSORY 

Follow Bit 8 status. * 

%- (subtract from sale) 

Not affect Sale Total * 

%+ (add to sale) 

- 46 - 

EO3-11070 




No. STATUS 

1 

SI1 Total Amount on 

Receipt and Remote slip 

on [SI1/TL] Depression 

RESET 

SET 

PRINT (and DISPLAY) 

NON-PRINT 

(DISPLAY only) 

* 

Will print on Journal in 

either status. 


2 

[SI1/TL] Key before 


RESET 

SET 

NOT COMPULSORY 

COMPULSORY 

* 

The [SI1/TL] key depression 

will calculate and 

finalize the SI1 content. 

3 

4 


Discount (%- function) 


Charge (%+ function) 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 


%- (subtract from sale) 

Not affect Sale Total 

* 

* 

If both RESET, the SI1 

content will not affect 

sales total at all (only 

display, print, or neither). 

(If both SET, it will result 

in %+ function.) 


SET %+ (add to sale) 

➤ 

15 

Refer to Bit 1 to 4 descriptions. 

NOTE 1: If Bit No.3 SET is selected, the preset % rate (to be set in a separate programming operation described 

later) will automatically subtract from the sale total. 

If Bit No. 4 SET status is selected, the preset % rate will automatically add to the sale total. 

If no preset % rate is set for the SI, 100% will be the rate (all SI amount). 

If both Bit No. 3 and No. 4 are RESET, the following will display (and print if Bit No. 1 is SET) without 

affecting the sale total: 

• If % rate is preset, the amount calculated by the % rate. 

• If % rate is not preset, the entire SI total amount (i.e. same as 100% preset). 

NOTE 2: The SI 1 total amount will print disregarding the Bit No. 1 status selection when Bit No. 3 or No. 4 is SET. 

(The same is applied to Bit No. 5 status selection as to SI 2 Total Print when Bit No. 7 or No. 8 is SET.)




No. STATUS 

1 

Remote Slip Print Compulsory 

for any PB entry in 

REG or MGR mode 

RESET 

SET 

NOT COMPULSORY 

COMPULSORY * NOTE 1 below. 

2 

Code No. Entry before 

[CHECK NO.] key. 

RESET NOT COMPULSORY * 

SET COMPULSORY 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

6 REMOTE SLIP PRINTER CONTROL 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Endorsement Print on: 

-- vacant - 

-- vacant -- 

Single or Double Slip Print 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

Remote Slip Printer * 

Receipt/Journal Printer 

SINGLE SLIP * 

DOUBLE SLIP 

- 47 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



0 

➤ 

With Multi-validation 

Function 


NOTE 1: This is applied ot the Previous Balance entry whether it is PB Manual Entry type or Check Track 

(Customer File) type. 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, it will be a “Double Slip” print, printing the Total Amount, Receipt Consecutive 

No., Time, Date, and Register No. twice. Total Amount will be 0 (zero) at All Void entry. Previous Balance 

(Manual Entry Type) and Endorsement Print will not be double slip even if SET status is selected.




No. STATUS 

1 

Display Message Method 

RESET 

SET 

16 CHARACTERS HELD 

SCROLLING DISPLAY * 

The message to be displayed 

is programmable, 

and it will be displayed in the 

Dot Windows. 

2 

Display Message in the 

REG and MGR modes 

RESET NON-DISPLAY * 

NOTE below. 

SET DISPLAY 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

7 OPTIONAL FUNCTION III 

Display Message during 

Signed-ON status 

Negative Card Check 

Inquiry 

-- vacant -- 

Caxhier Sign ON/OFF and 

Sign IN/OUT Receipts 

Drawer on Sign ON/OFF 

by Cashier 

Media Pick Up Warning 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

NON-DISPLAY * 

DISPLAY 

NOT INQUIRED * 

INQUIRED 

PRINT and ISSUE * 

NON-PRINT 

NOT OPEN * 

OPEN 

DISPLAY and ALARM * 

DISPLAY only 

- 48 - 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

1 

after the sale is 

finalized 

NOTE: The “Display Message” here indicates the message to be programmed in Submode 31. The message 

is displayed immediately when the Mode Lock is turned to the LOCK position, regardless of the status 

selection here. (The message is to be displayed in REG or MGR mode after a sale is finalized and no 

key-in operation takes place for 30 seconds.)




No. STATUS 

1 

Conversion of Shortened 

Type UPC-E of Barcodes 

RESET Padding preceding digits with 0 * 

NOTE below 

SET Converted to a 13-digit code 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

8 SCANNING OPTION I 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

- 49 - 

EO3-11070 



NOTE 1: This status selection is applied to the Read Code Nos. 2 and 11 (refer to the SCANNING SPECIFICATIONS in the SYSTEM 

EXPLANATION manual), and determines the way to convert the shortened code into a 13-digit code. 

Read Code No. 2 RESET (padding preceding digits with 0): 

Shortened Code = X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 → Converted = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 

SET (Converted to a 13 digit code) 

When X 6 = 5 to 9: 0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 0 0 0 0 X 6 

When X 6 = 4: 0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 0 0 0 0 0 X 5 

When X 6 = 3: 0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 3 0 0 0 0 0 X 4 X 5 

When X 6 = 0 to 2: 0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 6 0 0 0 0 X 3 X 4 X 5 

Read Code No. 11 RESET (padding preceding digits with 0): 

Shortened Code = X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 → Converted = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 

SET (Converted to a 13 digit code) 

0 0 0 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 0 0 0 0 X 6 

-- Address Nos. 9 and 10 are vacant. -- 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

➤ 

0




No. STATUS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

11 NON-PRINT OPTION III 

-- vacant -- 

Check No. Code in Endorsement 

Printing 

Date/Time Line in Endorsement 

Printing 

Sale Total Amount in 

Endorsement Printing 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

- 50 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

NOTE below 

NOTE: When SET is selected, the cashier code, consecutive No., date and time are not printed. 

-- Address Nos. 12 to 13 are vacant. --




No. STATUS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

14 MANAGER INTERVENTION 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 


the PLU Price Read 

-- vacant -- 

-- Address Nos. 15 is vacant. -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


REQUIRED 

- 51 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0

* This address is applicable for V2.0 or after. 




No. STATUS 

1 

Date of Birth Entry before 

the [ID] Key Depression RESET NOT COMPULSORY * 

NOTE 1 below. 

SET COMPULSORY 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

16 V2.0 OPTION 

-- vacant -- 

Memories of Transfer 

Items on taking Check 

Track Reset Report 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

NOT RESET TO ZERO * 

RESET TO ZERO 

- 52 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



0 

➤ 

NOTE 2 below. 

NOTE 1: If RESET status is selected, the [ID] key depression will be allowed regardless of the date of birth entry. 

If SET status is selected, the [ID] key depression will be allowed only after the date of birth entry. 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, the following items provided to the daily/GT financial memory will be all reset 

to 0 on taking the All Check Track Reset report. 

• TRF TL, TRF (+) GT, TRF (-) GT, TRF (+) daily, TRF (-) daily, PB TL, PB R/A, PB PO 

Taking the Zone Check Track Reset report will not reset those to 0. 

-- Address Nos. 17 and 18 are vacant. --




No. STATUS 

Single-or Multi-Validation 

RESET SINGLE-VALIDATION * 

NOTE 1 below. 

1 

SET MULTI-VALIDATION 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

19 VALIDATION 

Date Print 

Consecutive No. (of 

Receipt) 

Total Validation (after 

[TXBL TL] key) 

Cashier Code 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Validation Function 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

Prints TAXABLE TOTAL amount * 

Prints SALE TOTAL amount * 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

ACTIVE * 

NON-ACTIVE 

- 53 - 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



0 

➤ 

NOTE 2 below. 

No validation print operations 

will be allowed. 

Nor will a slip insertion be 

detected. 

NOTE 1: “SINGLE-VALIDATION” means that validation of the same item can be printed only once. (A second 

attempt to print the same item will result in an error.) 

“MULTI-VALIDATION” means that validation of the same item may be printed any number of times by 

alternating the validation slip and re-depressing the [VALIDATE] key. 

NOTE 2: If RESET status (Prints TAXABLE TOTAL amount) is selected, validation after a [TXBL TL] key 

depression will print Taxable Total amount of the sale items so far entered on the validation slip, and 

thereafter additional items, if any, be entered. 

If SET status (Prints SALE TOTAL amount) is selected, validation after a [TXBL TL] key depression will 

print the sale total amount (including taxes) on the validation slip, and thereafter only the finalization of 

the sale is expected. (No other operations will be accepted.)




No. STATUS 

1 

Multiple Taxes 

Consolidated or Separate 

Print on Receipt 

RESET 

SET 

CONSOLIDATED PRINT 

SEPARATE PRINT 

* 

NOTE 1 below 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

21 TAX CONTROL I 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Inclusive Tax Calculation 

Method 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

(Price x Rate) ÷ (1 + Rate) * 

(Price) x (Rate) 

- 54 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: When the GST feature is selected, this bit status selection is effective only if the GST & PST Separate 

Print option is selected. 

If RESET status is selected on the register with the inclusive tax feature adopted, amount of (exclusive 

tax + inclusive tax) will be printed. (Applicable for V1.9 or after) 

NOTE 2: This bit status selection is effective only when the inclusive tax feature has been selected. (Applicable 

for V1.9 or after)




No. STATUS 

1 

GST feature or FOOD 

STAMP feature 

RESET FOOD STAMP * 

SET GST 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

22 TAX CONTROL II 

GST Fraction Process 

ROUND UP 

GST Fraction Process 

DISCARD 

GST Print on Receipts 

PST & GST Consolidated 

or Separate Print 

Sale amount subject to 

PST calculation 

Tax 3 Status 

Tax 4 Status 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


ROUND UP 

ROUND OFF * 

DISCARD 

NON-PRINT 

PRINT * 

CONSOLIDATED 

SEPARATE * 

INCLUDING GST * 

EXCLUDING GST 

Exclusive Tax * 

Inclusive Tax 

Exclusive Tax * 

Inclusive Tax 

- 55 - 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

45 

If both RESET, 

ROUND OFF 

If both SET, DISCARD 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, you can further select printing PST on one consolidated line or separate 

lines (See Address 21-Bit 1). 

NOTE 2: When the inclusive tax feature has been selected, the GST feature (Bit 1 of this address) is unavailable. 

Also, the inclusive tax feature is unavailable in the area where the food stamp is used. (Applicable for 

V1.9 or after) 

-- Address No. 23 is vacant. --




No. STATUS 

1 

Print Selection of PLU 

scanned code 

RESET NON-PRINT * 

NOTE below 

SET PRINT 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

24 SCANNING OPTION II 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

- 56 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



0 

➤ 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, the scanned code is printed on journal when the PLU is entered in a sale. For 

the sub-link PLU code of the link PLU entry, however, the scanned code is not printed. This bit selection 

is valid only when the PLU inquiry is selected in the RAM Allocation Setting (expansion memory used 

on the stand-alone terminal). 





No. STATUS 

Drawer-close Compulsory 

RESET NOT COMPULSORY 

NOTE 1 below. 

1 

SET COMPULSORY * 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

27 DRAWER OPTION 

Drawer Warning Alarm 

Single-drawer or Multidrawer 

Multi-drawer Control 

Selection of Change at 

Tendering in Foreign 

Currencies 

Number of Drawers (if 

Multi-drawer spec.) 

Number of Drawers (if 

Multi-drawer spec.) 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

NON-ACTIVE * 

ACTIVE 

SINGLE DRAWER * 

MULTI DRAWERS 

By Cashier * 

By Currency 

in Domestic Currency * 

in Foreign Currency 


2 DRAWERS 


3 DRAWERS 

- 57 - 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

1 

NOTE 2 below. 

NOTE 3 below. 

The Bit 5 selection is 

effective. 

NOTE 4 below. 

If both RESET: 

1 DRAWER 

If both SET: 

4 DRAWERS 

NOTE 1: If SET, the Drawer-close Compulsory option is ON. In that case, when the drawer remains open, any operation except [RF], [JF], 

[VALIDATE], [C], numeric input for Sign-ON are prohibited. This rule is applied to REG, MGR, - , and LOCK modes; in other 

modes and during a Pick Up operation, the drawer may remain open. 

On V1.9 or after, even if SET atatus is selected, the operation of the [DISPLAY 6] key will be allowed while the drawer is open. 

NOTE 2: This status selection is effective only when Bit 1 is SET. If SET (ACTIVE), the setting in DRAWER WARNING TIME operation 

(Submode 38) will be effective. In that submode, a time value in seconds can be set for the time length with the drawer open until 

the Warning Alarm generated (the initial value is 15 seconds). 

NOTE 3: If SET, the Multi-drawer specification is selected. 

In case of Cashier Code Entry Method (using [LOG] or [LOG/RECEIPT] key), a drawer is to be designated in sale entries, and 

the number of drawers will be further selected at Bits 6 and 7. 

In case of Cashier Key Method, the drawer to be used will be fixed as in the following: 

Drawer 1 for Cashier 1, Drawer 2 for Cashier 2, Drawer 3 for Cashier 3, and Drawer 4 for Cashier 4 & all others. 

NOTE 4: If RESET, both Drawers 1 and 2 will be opened to enable accesses to both Domestic and Foreign Currencies. 

If SET, only Drawer 2 will be opened to enable an access to Foreign Currencies only.




No. STATUS 

1 

No-sale Entry After Nonadd 

# Entry 

RESET ALLOWED * 

SET PROHIBITED 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

28 OPTIONAL FUNCTION IV 

Number of Times for Nonadd 

# Entries Within a 

Receipt 

[RF] Operation During a 

Sale 

Consecutive No. on 

Receipt and Journal 

Consecutive No. Resetting 

Negative Mode ( - ) 

Operation 

-- vacant -- 

Triple Multiplication feature 

or S.P.P. (Split Package 

Pricing feature) 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

ANY NUMBER OF TIMES * 

ONLY ONCE ALLOWED 

ALLOWED * 

PROHIBITED 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

NON-RESETTABLE * 

RESET ON Financial Daily Z 

ALLOWED * 

PROHIBITED 

S.P.P. * 

TRIPLE MULTIPLICATION 

- 58 - 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

[JF] is allowed anytime. 

Even when NON-PRINT, 

the Consecutive No. is 

counted up in memory. 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, the Consecutive No. will start “0001” on the first receipt issued after every 

Financial Daily Reset Report. 

NOTE 2: Triple Multiplication: QUANTITY 1 x QUANTITY 2 x UNIT PRICE (Quantity can be entered twice.)




No. STATUS 

1 

Preset Point for one 

decimal digit 

RESET Ordinary Digit Process * 

NOTE 1 below 

SET Preset Point One Decimal Digit 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

29 OPTIONAL FUNCTION V 

U.S. Balance or CANADA 

Balance 

CANADA TAX Type 

Taxable Total Display by 

[ST] key depression 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

U.S. Balance * 

CANADA Balance 

QUEBEC Tax * 

ONTARIO Tax 

SUBTOTAL Display * 

TAXABLE TOTAL Display 

- 59 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

will not include tax 

amount in Hourly 

Range memory. 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: This is the digit selection for the preset price value of Departments and PLUs: 

(This is applied only to those models with zero-suppress form of 0.00) 

ex.) RESET Status: $0,01 to $9999,99 

SET Status: $0,001 to $999,999 

NOTE 2: 

When the SET status (Preset Point ALLOWED) is selected, neither scale entries nor Split Package Pricing on the register will 

be allowed. 

When SET status is selected: 

• Displays the sale total amount including taxes due while prints the subtotal amount (sale total amount pretaxed). 

Whether printing occurs or not is determined by the ST Print option (Address 1-Bit 3 RESET for Print or SET for Non-print). 

• If this option and the [TXBL TL] Key Compulsory option is selected, the [ST] key can replace the [TXBL TL] key before 

finalizing a sale. 

• When % or DOLL DISC is entered after the [ST] depression, the calculation will be made on the pretaxed amount. 

• When validation print is operated after a [ST] entry, the pretaxed sale total (subtotal) is printed on the slip. 

• The [ST] key can also be used before finalizing a sale with Foreign Currency tendering.




No. STATUS 

1 

IPD or INPD on Journal in 

REG and MGR modes 

RESET IPD * 

NOTE 1 below 

SET INPD 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

30 OPTIONAL FUNCTION VI 

CARD No. Entry for a sale 

finalized by [Chg] Key 

LOAN and PICK UP 

operations 

LOAN and PICK UP 

Memory Process 

Previous Balance Manual 

Entry, or Check Track 

Memory feature 

Total Amount Print as the 

last line on Receipts 

FOOD STAMP Process 

FOOD STAMP Process 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


COMPULSORY 

PROHIBITED 

ALLOWED * 

To Cashier memory only * 

To Cashier and Financial 

Manual Entry * 

Check Track Memory 

NON-PRINT * 

PRINT 

ILLINOIS Type 

NEW JERSEY Type 

- 60 - 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



3 

➤ 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 

NOTE 4 below 

If both RESET, 

GENERAL Type 

If both SET, 

GENERAL Type 

NOTE 1: RESET Status: IPD (Items Printed Detail) -- Prints on journal details of the sale entry, just as on 

receipts. 

SET Status: INPD (Items Not Printed Detail) -- Skips positive Department or PLU items on 

journal. However, Negative items (Returned Merchandise, Item Correct, Negative 

Dept/PLU, Void, All Void, etc.) will be printed. 

NOTE 2: If SET status (COMPULSORY) is selected, the sale cannot be finalized by [Chg] key until entering a 

CARD No. This option is applicable to the [Chg] key only but not those credit media keys of [CREDIT 

1] to [CREDIT 4]. 

NOTE 3: RESET Status: Charge posting is operated by manually entering previous balance. 

SET Status: Charge posting is operated by Check Track (Customer File) memory. 

NOTE 4: Even if SET Status (Total Amount Print) is selected, printing is not performed in Previous Balance 

(Manual Entry Type), Loan, Pick Up, Received-on-Account and Paid Out operation.




No. STATUS 

Customer Display Method 

RESET ORDINARY (Increment Type) * 

NOTE below 

1 

SET PUT-AWAY (Holding Type) 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

31 OPTIONAL FUNCTION VII 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Store Name Print by 

Rubber Stamp or Dot 

Printer 

Department and Minor 

Group Print Order in All- 

Dept Report 

Group Print in All Department 

Read Report 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RUBBER STAMP * 

DOT PRINT 

DEPTs first, then GROUPs * 

DEPT and GROUP alternately 

NON-PRINT * 

PRINT 

- 61 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



NOTE: ORDINARY DISPLAY......... The numeric data will be displayed as each digit is entered one by one 

(same as Operator Display). 

PUT-AWAY DISPLAY......... The numeric data being entered will not be displayed until a function key 

is depressed. 

This selection is possible only when the 2-line RIU (field option) is installed. 

➤ 

0




No. STATUS 

1 

[%+] and [%-] after a 

Subtotal Within a Sale 

RESET ANY NUMBER OF TIMES 

SET ONLY ONCE ALLOWED * 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

32 OPTIONAL FUNCTION VIII 

-- vacant -- 

Automatic Cashier Sign 

OUT on finalizing a sale 

[%I] Key Use (= SFKC 70) 

[%II] Key Use (= SFKC 71) 

Amount Print on [Chg] 

Depression to Finalize a 

Sale including Previous 

Balance 

Salesperson Sign-ON 

Before Sales Item Entries 

Salesperson Sign-ON Any 

time During a Sale 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

NON-ACTIVE * 

ACTIVE 

USED AS [% +] KEY * 

USED AS [% -] KEY 

USED AS [% -] KEY * 

USED AS [% +] KEY 

Sale Total Including PB * 

Sale Total Excluding PB 


COMPULSORY 

ALLOWED * 

PROHIBITED 

- 62 - 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

1 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

Displays Sale total 

amount including PB in 

either status. 

NOTE 3 below 

Allowed any time during a 

sale. 

Allowed only at starting of 

a sale. 

NOTE 1: SET (ACTIVE) status: The signed-ON or signed-IN cashier will automatically be signed OUT on finalizing each sale, including 

NOTE 2: 

Check Cashing, Foreign Currency Exchange, No-sale, Received-on-account, Paid-out, Loan, and Pick Up. However, when the 

VALIDATION COMPULSORY or ENDORSEMENT COMPULSORY status is on the finalizing media, the automatic sign-OUT will 

occur on performing the validation or endorsement print of the media. The Automatic Cashier Sign-OUT will not print on Receipt 

nor Journal. 

Bit No.4 and No.5 are provided in case your user wants two [%-] keys or two [%+] keys rather than one for each. 

One [%+] and one [%-] (Standard Bit Status): Bit 4 ... RESET (%I = %+) Bit 5 ... RESET (%II = %-) 

Two[%-] keys: Bit 4 ... SET (%I = %-) Bit 5 ... RESET (%II = %-) 

In this case, do not forget to change the Financial Total Name of the %I key. 

Two [%+] keys: Bit 4 ... RESET (%I = %+) Bit 5 ... SET (%II = %+) 

In this case, do not forget to change the Financial Total Name of the %II key. 

NOTE 3: NOT COMPULSORY ..................... A Salesperson Sign-ON may or may not be operated for sale entries. 

COMPULSORY .............................. A Salesperson must sign ON first of all the sale items of Department, PLU, Dollar Discount, 

Vendor Coupon, Bottle Return, PB +, PB -, or Check Track No. entries.




No. STATUS 

1 

2 

Date Set and Print Order 

Date Set and Print Order 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 


MONTH-DAY-YEAR 


* 


YEAR-MONTH-DAY 

order. 

(If both SET, it will result 

in MONTH-DAY-YEAR.) 

SET DAY-MONTH-YEAR 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

33 OPTIONAL FUNCTION IX 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

- 63 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

1




No. STATUS 

1 

Decimal Point in Item 

Count and % Rate 

RESET 

SET 

• (POINT) 

, (COMMA) 

* 

-- ex.) 1.5% 

-- ex.) 1,5% 

2 

Amount Division Symbol 

between Main and Subsidiary 

digits for 0.00 type 

RESET 

SET 

• (POINT) 

, (COMMA) 

* 

-- ex.) $2.50 

-- ex.) $2,50 

3 

Amount Division Symbol 

between 3rd and 4th digits 

for. -- 0 type 

RESET 

SET 

• (POINT) 

, (COMMA) * 

-- ex.) ¥1.000 

-- ex.) ¥1,000 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

34 OPTIONAL FUNCTION X 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Weight Print Zero Suppress 

in Sale Entries 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

Not zero-suppressed * 

Zero Suppress Form 

- 64 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

3 

-- ex.) 04.00 LB 

(for 4 LB) 

-- ex.) 4.00 LB 

(for 4 LB)




No. STATUS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

35 SCALE OPTION 

Scale Data 5 or 4 digits for 

Parallel Type Scale 

-- vacant -- 

Weight Unit Print Selection 


ROUND UP 


DISCARD 

Scale Connection 

Manual Weight Entry for 

Return or Void only (in 

REG or MGR mode) 

Manual Weight Entry for 

all kinds (in REG or MGR 

mode) 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

5 digits * 

4 digits 

NOTE 1: Special Rounding Process for Scale Entries (when Bit 4 and Bit 5 are both SET): 

Kg 

LB * 

Follow Bit 5 status * 

ROUND UP 

Follow Bit 4 status * 

DISCARD 

CONNECTED * 

DISCONNECTED 

PROHIBITED * 

ALLOWED 

PROHIBITED * 

ALLOWED 

- 65 - 

EO3-11070 



3 

➤ 

Fraction Resulting Least Effective Digit Post-rounded Value of the 

Least Effective Digit 

0 

1 

2 

3 

➤ 0 

ROUND OFF 

➤ 

4 

5 

6 

7 

➤ 5 

8 

9 

➤ 

1 0 

NOTE 2: In the Negative Entry Mode ( - ), Manual Weight Entries are always allowed, regardless of these status selections. When anything 

is on the scale platter with the Scale-connection feature, no Manual Weight Entry will be accepted. 

* 


ROUND OFF. 

If both SET, the fraction 

value is first ROUNDED 

OFF, then the least 

effective digit value is 

special-rounded: 


-- Allows auto-scale entries if a 

scale is connected. 

-- Prohibits auto-scale entries 

even if a scale is connected. 

If both RESET, Manual 

Weight Entry will be 

prohibited by all means. If 

only Bit 7 is SET, only 

Return and Void entries 

are allowed for Manual 

Weight operations. 


➤ 

to the next 

upper digit




No. STATUS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

36 FOREIGN CURRENCY OPTION 

[CUR 1] (Foreign Currency 

1) Zero-suppress 

Display 



Display 



Display 



Display 



Display 

Foreign Currency Tender 

Amount Print in payment 

of a sale 

Foreign Currency Exchange 

Rate Print in 

payment or No-sale 

Exchange 

No-sale Exchange from 

Domestic to Foreign 

Currencies 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

0.00 (£, F, DM, etc.) * 

.--0 (such as Japan yen) 

0.00 (£, F, DM, etc.) * 


0.00 (£, F, DM, etc.) * 


0.00 (£, F, DM, etc.) * 


0.00 (£, F, DM, etc.) * 


NON-PRINT * 

PRINT 

NON-PRINT * 

PRINT 

PROHIBITED * 

ALLOWED 

- 66 - 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

These bits selections are 

also applied to the print. 

Exchange from a Foreign 

Currency to the Domestic 

Currency is always 

allowed.


2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

37 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XI 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 


- 67 - 

EO3-11070 




No. STATUS 

1 

PLU Tax/Food Stamp 

Status on PLU Entry 

RESET 

SET 

Obeys PLU Own Status 

Obeys Status of the Linked 

Department 

* 

This bit is applicable for 

V2.0 or after. 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

Post-issue Receipt Print 

Form 

Post-issue Receipt After a 

normal receipt issuance 

Number of Post-issue 

Receipt copies to be 

issued 

% calculation on additional 

item entries after Subtotal 

and % entries 

PLU Code 6 digits or 13 

digits 

ITEMIZED RECEIPT * 

TOTAL-only RECEIPT 

PROHIBITED * 

ALLOWED 

Only ONE copy * 

Any number of copies 

Calculates on the entire sale * 

Calculates on the additional items 

Max. 6 digits * 


* 

* 

➤ 

0 

NOTE 1 below. 

NOTE 2 below. 

NOTE 1: If RESET status is selected, a sale of maximum of 50 lines will be issued as an itemized receipt. Exceeding 50 lines, a total-only 

receipt will be issued. 

If SET status is selected, a total-only receipt will be always issued for the post-issue receipt operation. 

If SET status is selected on V1.9 or after, the post-issue receipt operation will be effective for the Received-on-Account and the 

Charge Posting transactions. 

• When the post-issue receipt operation is performed after the Received-on-Account transaction, the Received-on-Account 

total amojnt will be printed on a post-issue receipt. 

• When the post-issue receipt operation is performed after the [TRF] key is depressed during the Charge Posting transaction, 

sale total amount and new balance amount will be printed on a post-issue receipt. Whether or not sale total amount includes 

previous balance depends on the selection of Addess 32-Bit 6. 

• When the post-issue receipt operation is performed after the [R/A] key is depressed during the Charge Posting transaction, 

received-on-account total amount and new balance amount will be printed on a post-issue receipt. 

NOTE 2: If RESET status is selected, % calculation is performed on the additional items entered after the first Subtotal and % entries and 

before the second Subtotal and % entries (i.e., on the group subtotal) 

ex) Department Entries [ST] [%+] Department Entries [ST] [%-] .......... 

(A) (B) 

Calculates % on the amount of 

Group (B) not including Group (A).




No. STATUS 

1 -- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

* 

This bit must always be 

RESET 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

38 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XII 

Cashier Identifying 

Method: 

Push Stay Down Keys 

Cashier Identifying 

Method: 

Push SFKC Keys 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

Code Entry Method * 

PUSH STAY DOWN Keys 


SFKC Keys 

NOTE: If Bit 3 is SET, it prevails the settings of Bits 1 and 2. 

-- Address No. 39 is vacant. -- 

- 68 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



0 

➤ 

NOTE below





No. STATUS 

[DISPLAY 1] Key Function 

RESET TENDER/TOTAL * 

NOTE 1 below 

1 

SET TOTAL ONLY 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

40 EBT OPTION I 





-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

TENDER/TOTAL * 

TOTAL ONLY 


TOTAL ONLY 


TOTAL ONLY 


TOTAL ONLY 

- 69 - 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, the operation of the [DISPLAY] key performed after tendering operation will 

be prohibited. 

Each bit status selection is effective only when “RESET” status has been selected for the corresponding 

bit of the next address (Address 41). 

If both this address and the next address are SET or RESET, the operation of total/over-tendering/shorttendering 

will be allowed using each [DISPLAY] key. 

➤ 

0





No. STATUS 

1 

Over-tendering using the 


RESET Allowed * 

NOTE 1 below 

SET Prohibited 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

41 EBT OPTION II 









-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

Allowed * 

Prohibited 

Allowed * 

Prohibited 

Allowed * 

Prohibited 

Allowed * 

Prohibited 

- 70 - 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, entry of tendering amount large than the food stampable total will be prohibited. 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, entry of tendering amount large than the taxable total will be prohibited. 

Each status selection of bits 1 to 5 is effective only when “RESET” status has been selected for the 

corresponding bit of the preceding address (Address 40). 

If both this address and the preceding address are SET or RESET, the operation of total/over-tendering/ 

short-tendering will be allowed using each [DISPLAY] key. 





No. STATUS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 


44 EFT OPTION 

-- vacant -- 

Store Copy printed on the 

Store Receipt 

Issuance of the Store 

Receipt 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

PRINT * 

NON-PRINT 

ISSUED MANUALLY * 

ISSUED AUTOMATICALLY 

- 71 - 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

NOTE below. 

NOTE: RESET Status: Store receipt is issued by depressing the [STORE RECEIPT] key after the EFT sale 

finalization. 

* Applicable to the ECR with the manual cutter attached. 

SET Status: Store receipt is automatically issued after the EFT sale finalization.




No. STATUS 

Copying of Backup Data 

RESET Manual Copying only * 

1 

SET Auto Copying feature 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

46 IN-LINE OPTION 

Retry for Collection 

Retry for DLL 

Reports are issued from 

Satellite at In-Line Reset 

Report taking 

Individual ECR Financial 

Reports from Master at Inline 

Reset Report taking 

Individual ECR Financial 

Reports from Master at Inline 

Read Report taking 

Reset Data Protection in 

Communication Buffer 

-- vacant -- 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

Manual Retry only * 

Auto Retry feature 

Manual Retry only * 

Auto Retry feature 

Issue 

Not issue * 

Issue 

Not issue * 

Issue 

Not issue * 

Rewriting Prohibited * 

Rewriting Allowed 

- 72 - 

EO3-11070 



Status selection in this address are effective only when the ECR has installed the RTR IFU and a RAM Clear has been operated. 

Otherwise, each bit status selection will be disregarded. 

Bit 1 SET status: The Backup Data Auto Copying feature is adopted, in which case Manual Copying is allowed as well. 

Bit 2 SET status: In in-line read or reset report takings (including Terminal Open Check), when there is any uncollected ECRs and the 

operator’s Retry or Abort waiting lasts 10 seconds, an Auto Retry will be started and repeats the cycle of 10 seconds; 

Waiting and Retry. When the operator performs a manual Retry during that 10 seconds’ period or performed an Abort, 

the manual operation will be effective. When a power failure occurs in the 10 seconds; Waiting status, the count will be 

started from the remaining of the Wait time after the power recovery. 

Bit 3 SET status: Auto-retry is performed during DLL. For operation, refer to the explanation for Bit 2. 

Bit 4: This determines whether reports are issued form Satellite ECRs or not at the time of in-line Reset Report takings. 

When the CVS feature is selected, this bit does not function. The status is fixed at “Not issue”. 

Bit 5: This determines whether reports of individual ECRs’ Financial Reports (Daily and GT) are issued from the Master 

Terminal at the time of in-line Reset Report takings. 

Bit 6: This determines whether reports of individual ECRs’ Financial Reports (Daily and GT) are issued from the Master 

Terminal at the time of in-line Read Report takings. 

* 

➤ 

456




No. STATUS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

47 PC OPTION 

-- vacant -- 

BCC Receive Text Checking 

Reset Report Issuance on 

Master Terminal Started 

by PC 

Data Transmission to PC 

Transaction Data Sending 

to PC 

Zero-skip of PLU Data 

When Transmitting to PC 

-- vacant -- 

Reservation for Center File 

(PLU, CASHIER, and etc.) 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

RESET 

SET 

CHECK * 

NON-CHECK 

NON-ISSUE * 

ISSUE 


COMPULSORY 

NOT SEND * 

SEND 

Print all PLU data * 

Zero-skip 

PROHIBITED * 

ALLOWED 

- 73 - 

* 

* 

EO3-11070 



➤ 

0 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: Reset reports issuable on Master Terminal are as follows. 

• Reports of which data is stored in the Center File. 

• Reports of which data is stored in the Consolidation Area. 

When a reset operation directed from the PC is performed, the master terminal is placed in a hold state 

(registration prohibited). 

NOTE 2: After issuing an In-line Reset Report (consolidation type only) on the Master Terminal, no In-line 

Services will be accepted until the reset data is sent to the PC.

STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND COMMERCIAL MESSAGE 

PROGRAMMING (Submode 1) 


OPERATION Mode Lock: SET 

1 [X] ➤ | Line No. | [ST] 

. 

. 

Submode No. 

➤ 

. 

. 

1 to 7 

or (See NOTE 2 below.) 

5 to 7 

➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] 

max. 24 characters/line 

. 

. 

(See CHARACTER ENTRIES at To complete 

the beginning of this chapter.) this line 

➤ 

(For sequentially 

programming lines, the 

line number specification 

can be skipped.) 

- 74 - 

Repeat for 

another line. 

➤ [AT/TL] 

. 

. 

To complete this 

programming 

operation 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. For each line, a maximum of 24 regular-sized characters or 12 double-sized characters may be 

entered. A combination of both types is also available. 

2. Even if the option “Store Name Print by RUBBER STAMP” is selected, data can be programmed 

for the store name/message. However, the Rubber Stamp, instead of the programmed name/ 

message will actually be printed for operations to issue receipts. 

If the option “Store Name Print by DOT PRINTER” is selected, use 1 through 4 for the store name/ 

message and 5 through 7 for the commercial message data, as Line No. 

The range of Line Nos. 5 to 7 is unavailable to a manual-cut printer. 

3. If no commercial message is required on the receipt, program blanks for all three lines. As a result 

no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is programmed, the two other lines will cause 

line feeds. 

4. The 4-line range assigned for the store name/message will be either printed or fed, regardless 

of any system option selection. 

5. If any incorrect characters have been programmed, depress the [C] key to clear all the characters 

on a line and then re-enter characters from the beginning, or end the line with an [ST] and reprogram 

the entire line. The new data will be active. 

6. When all the lines have been programmed, do a check by issuing a receipt. Only the lines with 

errors need to be re-programmed; other lines will not be affected.

O p e n 

T E C S T O R E 

1 3 4 3 

C l o s e d : 

P H O N E : 

P E A C H D R I V E 

8 7 - 6 4 3 7 

8 : 0 0 a m t o 7 : 0 0 p m 

e v e r y W e d n e s d a y 

OPERATION: Presumed that nothing has been programmed on each line. 

Mode Lock; SET; enter 1, depress [X]. 

1 [ST] (Line No. 1) (3 [ST]) (Line No. 3) 

[#] (space) [#] (space) 



[X] 504 [#] (T) [#] (space) 

[X] 405 [#] (E) [#] (space) 

[X] 403 [#] (C) 500 [#] (P) 

[#] (space) 408 [#] (H) 

[#] (space) 415 [#] (O) 

[X] 503 [#] (S) 414 [#] (N) 

[X] 504 [#] (T) 405 [#] (E) 

[X] 415 [#] (O) 310 [#] (:) 

[X] 502 [#] (R) [#] (space) 

[X] 405 [#] (E) 308 [#] (8) 

[ST] (to complete Line 1) 307 [#] (7) 

213 [#] (-) 

(2 [ST]) (Line No. 2) 306 [#] (6) 

[#] (space) 304 [#] (4) 

[#] (space) 303 [#] (3) 

[#] (space) 307 [#] (7) 

[#] (space) [ST] (to complete Line 3) 

301 [#] (1) 

303 [#] (3) 5 [ST] (Line No. 5) 

304 [#] (4) 415 [#] (O) 

303 [#] (3) 700 [#] (p) 

[#] (space) 605 [#] (e) 

500 [#] (P) 614 [#] (n) 

405 [#] (E) [#] (space) 

401 [#] (A) 

403 [#] (C) 

408 [#] (H) [ST] (to complete Line 5) 

[#] (space) 

404 [#] (D) (6 [ST]) (Line No. 6) 

502 [#] (R) 403 [#] (C) 

409 [#] (I) 612 [#] (l) 

506 [#] (V) 615 [#] (o) 

405 [#] (E) 703 [#] (s) 

[ST] (to complete Line 2) 


[AT/TL] to complete this submode. 

- 75 - 

EO3-11070 


ex.) To program the following draft as the Store Name/Message and Commercial Message (under the option 

“Store Name by DOT PRINTER”): 

.. 

....... ....... 

Line No. 1 

Line No. 2 

Line No. 3 

Line No. 4 

Line No. 5 

Line No. 6 

Line No. 7 

Store Name/ 

Message portion, 

Which can be 

replaced by a 

RUBBER STAMP 

print under the 

option “Store Name 

by RUBBER 

STAMP”. 

Commercial 

Message portion. 

11-14-1994 MON #0 

P01 

1 

TEC STORE 

2 

1343 PEACH DRIVE 

3 

PHONE: 87-6437 

5 

Open 8:00am to 7:00pm 

6 

Closed: every Wednesday 

0007

CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 2) 

Programming 



2 [X] ➤ | Cashier Code | [NS] 

. 

. 

. 

(See NOTE 1 below.) 

Submode No. 

For Address 1 : Cashier Name 

➤ 1 [ST] ➤ Character Entries 

(max. 12 characters) 

Repeat for 

another cashier. 

➤ 

➤ 

[AT/TL] 

➤ 

For Address 2 : Cashier Status 

➤ 2 [ST] 

➤ 

------ 

○ ○ ○ 

○ ○ ○ 

.... For sequentially porgramming the address, the 

Address number specification can be skipped. 

- 76 - 

[ST] 

➤ | Cashier Status | [#] 

0: Cashier for Sale Entries 

1: Cashier for Training Entries 

Standard Memory Expansion Memory 

Code Entry Type 1 to 15 1 to 99 

Cashier Push-stay 1 to 4, 99* --- 

Key Type [CLK] key 1 to 8, 99* --- 

➤ 

--------- 

➤ 

➤ 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered (the capacity is determined by 

the RAM Allocation Setting). 

* The Cashier Code 99 for the Cashier Key Type is fixed as a code of a cashier for Training 

Entries. 

2. For the name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters can 

be entered. A combination of both types is also available. (At least one character must be entered 

here.) 

3. When adopting the Push-stay Cashier Key, the cashier key “OFF” status is required for this 

programming.

ex.) To program the following cashier data: 

Cashier Code 1: Name JONES, Status 0 (for Sale Entries) 

Cashier Code 2: Name SMITH, Status 0 (for Sale Entries) 

Cashier Code 3: Name MEHL, Status 1 (for Training Entries) 

Cashier Code 4: Name BROWN, Status 1 (for Training Entries) 

Mode Lock: SET 

Enter 2, depress [X]. 

Enter 1, depress [NS] (Cashier Code) 

Enter 1, depress [ST] (Address 1: Name) 

Enter 410, depress [#] (J) 

Enter 415, depress [#] (O) 

Enter 414, depress [#] (N) 

Enter 405, depress [#] (E) 

Enter 503, depress [#] (S) 

Depress [ST] (to end Name setting) 

(Enter 2, depress [ST]) (Address 2: Status) 

Enter 0, depress [#] (for Sales Entries) 



Enter 503, depress [#] (S) 

........ ........ 

Enter 408, depress [#] (H) 

Depress [ST] (to end Name setting) 


Enter 0, depress [#] (for Sales Entries) 



Enter 413, depress [#] (M) 

Enter 412, depress [#] (L) 


Enter 1, depress [#] (for Training Entries) 



Enter 402, depress [#] (B) 

........ 

Enter 414, depress [#] (N) 


Enter 1, depress [#] (for Training Entries) 

Depress [AT/TL] to end this submode. 

- 77 - 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P02 

01 

#01 JONES 

#02 0 

02 

#01 SMITH 

#02 0 

03 

#01 MEHL 

#02 1 

04 

#01 BROWN 

#02 1 

00004 

0016

Deletion 

➤ 

2 [X] ➤ [ITEM CORR] 

or 

➤ |Cashier Code| [NS] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Submode No. [VOID] 

.... 

Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted. 

- 78 - 

EO3-11070 


CONDITION After the Daily and GT Cashier’s Resets, (and his/her Sign OFF for Code Entry Type) 


NOTES: 1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier will be cleared. 

2. The cashier key or cashier code of the deleted cashier cannot be used or signed-ON for sale 

entries. 

ex.) To delete Cashier Code 1 with name “JONES” 

that has been programmed in the preceding page: 



Depress [ITEM CORR] (for declaration of deletion) 


Depress [AT/TL] to end this program. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P02 

01 JONES 

------------------------ 

0017

DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 3) 

EE 

Programming 

CONDITION To change the Positive/Negative Status: 

After Department and PLU Daily and GT Resets 

To change any other programmed data or to newly program departments: 

Any time outside a sale 


Submode No. 

Repeat for 

other 

departments. 

As for details of each Address, 

refer to the following pages. 

3 [X] |Address Nos| [#] 

(NOTE 1 on the next page.) 

Repeat for any 

address within 

the same dept. 

by re-entry for 

correction. 

(NOTE 3 ). 

[ST] 

Address 1: Link Group 

1 [ST] 

Address 2: Department Name 

2 [ST] 

Address 3: Preset Price 

3 [ST] 

Address 4: Status 1 Codes 

4 [ST] 


5 [ST] 

Address 6: Tax Status 

6 [ST] 

Address 7: High Amount Limit 

7 [ST] 

Address 8: Low Amount Limit 

8 [ST] 

Address 9: Sub-link Dept. Code 

9 [ST] 

[AT/TL] (to complete this submode) 

- 79 - 


[DEPT] 

|Department Code| [DP#] 

for sequential-coded Dept. only 

|Major GP| |Minor GP| [#] 

(01 to 10) (01 to 30) 

Character Entries [ST] 

max. 16 characters 

|Price| [#] 

(max. 6 digits) 

|Status Code to ON| [#] 






|High Amount to be locked out| [#] 


|Low Amount to be locked out| [#] 


|Sub-link Dept. Code| [#] 

(1 to 99) 

EO3-11070 


- 80 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “3 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered, 

the designated Address(es) will automatically be accessed after the department designation. For 

example, if you enter |0204| [#] here (designate each address by entering a two-digit code; 01 

for Address 1, 02 for Address 2, etc.), you will then enter: 

[DEPT] key , or Dept Code + [DP#] key, 

Character Entries [ST] (“2 [ST]” can be skipped), then 

Status Codes [#] (“4 [ST]” can be skipped), then 

may go on to another department setting for the same address designations. 

But still in this case, you can go to other addresses by first entering the Address No. and 

depressing [ST]. The Address Designation feature may be useful when you want to program or 

change contents of only one or two specific Addresses of multiple departments. (For example, 

when you want to change only the names, but not any other programmed contents, of 15 

departments.) 

2. The “[DEPT]” key here means each of the individual department keys of Dept Preset-code type. 

For example, if you have [DEPT 1] (Department No.1) key, you can depress it, or you may enter 

1 then depress [DP#] to start Department No.1 programming procedure. You can only enter the 

Dept Code and then depress [DP#] to start any other department than those installed as Dept 

Preset-code Keys. When you use a Flat Keyboard and the Setting Mode Key Layout sheet is 

inserted, any department may be accessed by using the [DP#] key in the SET mode operations. 

Up to 99 depts can be programmed. The [DP#] key should be used to program depts 61 to 99. 

(In SFKC programming, up to 60 depts can be programmed.) 

3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (and when the Address 

Designation feature has not been used), the Address No. and [ST] may be omitted. 

4. The programming contents of each address are further described in the DEPARTMENT 

PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below. 

DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS 

Address No. Description of Programming Contents 

1 Linked Group Code 

Enter a 4-digit code, composed of a 2-digit Major Group Code and a 2-digit 

Minor Group Code. 

ex.) 

[#] 

Minor Group Code 01 to 30 

Major Group Code 01 to 10 

To link Major Group No. 1 and Minor Group No. 1: 

Enter: (0) 1 0 1 

Major Group Minor Group 

Code 

Code 

Enter 00 when the department is not 

linked to any Minor Group. 

Enter 0 (or 00) when the department is not linked to 

any Major Group. 



-- Continued -- 

(1) Enter 0 for linking neither Major nor Minor Groups (the preceding zeros may be 

omitted). 

NOTE: The “Major Group” and “Minor Group” here are merely namings for those two 

grouping total memories. In the memory process, those two totals are 

independent from the other and no logical check is made for a combination 

of the Major and Minor group codes to be linked to each department. In other 

words, you may regard then as “A” grouping and “B” grouping. See the 

examples below: 

Major-Minor Grouping Method Example: 

(In this case, you should check the logical linkage between the Major Groups 

and Minor Groups.) 

Major GP 01 Major GP 02 

Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor 

GP 01 GP 02 GP 03 GP 04 GP 05 

DP01 DP02 DP04 DP06 DP07 DP10 DP11 DP14 DP16 

➤ 0101 0101 0102 0103 0103 0204 0204 0205 0205 

Linked Group Code in setting 

“A” Grouping and “B” Grouping Method Example: 

(In this case, you may think that each department data are processed into max. 

2 different types of groupings.) 

A-GP A-GP A-GP B-GP B-GP B-GP 

01 02 03 01 02 03 

DP01 DP02 DP04 DP06 DP07 DP10 DP11 DP14 DP16 DP17 

➤ 0100 0100 0201 0301 0300 0302 0002 0003 0003 0002 

Linked Group Code in setting 

2 Department Name (Descriptor) 

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the 

CHARACTER ENTRIES, at the beginning of this chapter. End with [ST]. 

When no name is programmed for a department, the following will be the autoprogram 

name (default value) for printing: 

D P xx 

Department Code 01 to 99 

Double-sized characters 


- 81 - 

EO3-11070 




3 Preset Price 

• For a preset department (preset-price department), enter a maximum of 6digit 

price, and depress [#]. 

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99) 

When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed” is selected, the 

decimal digit can be entered after entering a maximum of 5 integer digits and 

[•] key. 

1 to 99999 (result: $0.01 to $999.99) 

or 

0.1 to 99999.9 (result: $0.001 to $999.999) 

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation. 

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the 

department will be an open department (open-price department). 

• For a department handling gasoline, set the preset price per gallon (max. 

999.999 = 999 dollars 99.9 cents can be preset). 

Be certain to enter the amount less than cent when programming the preset 

price of gasoline. 

ex.) To set the preset price of $1.25, enter the numeric value of 1250. 

4 Status 1 Selection 

• Enter the Status Codes 1 to 7 whose status must be set to ON side. More than 

one code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set 

to ON. 

Status Item Selective Status 

Code OFF ON 

1 Itemized or Single-item Itemized Single-item 

2 Ordinary or Other Income Dept. Ordinary Other Income 

3 Positive or Negative Dept. Positive Negative 

4 Food Stamp (or GST) Applicable No Yes 

5 Scale Entry Prohibited Allowed 

6 Department for Gasoline Sales? No Yes 

7 Validation Compulsory No Yes 

NOTE: Itemized, Single-item: 

Refer to DEPARTMENT KEY description in the Owner’s Manual 

(stand-alone level). 

When Status Code 6 is set to ON (for Gasoline Sales), be sure to set a 

preset price in Address 3. 

Status Code 5 (Scale Allowed) and 6 (Gasoline Sales) cannot be set to 

ON simultaneously for one department 


- 82 - 

EO3-11070 




Setting Examples: 

To set only Status 2 to ON .............. Enter 2 [#] 

To set Statuses 2, 3, 5 to ON .......... Enter 235 [#] 

To set none of statuses to ON ........ Enter 0 [#] 


• Enter Status Codes 1 to 7 whose status must be set to ON side. 


Code OFF ON 

1 Net to S.I. 1? No Yes 

2 Net to S.I. 2? No Yes 

3 Tare 3 Entry Optional Compulsory 

4 Tax Symbol “F” Print 

(Applicable for V1.9 or after) 

Non-print Print 

5 Canada Non-taxable Quantity 


Not objective Objective 

6 Age Limit 2 Status Unnecessary Necessary 

(Applicable for V2.0 or after) (Age confirmation) (Age confirmation) 


(Applicable for V2.0 or after) (Age confirmation) (Age confirmation) 

NOTES 1. “Net to S.I. 1, 2” 

Refer to the section “PRESET RATE SETTING FOR SELEC- 

TIVE ITEMIZERS” near the end of this chapter. 

2. Tax symbol “F” is printed when this status code has been set “ON” to a 

taxable department. 

• If the GST feature has been selected, this symbol “F” will be always 

printed regardless of this code status when a GST taxable department 

is entered. 

• If the Food Stamp feature has been selected, this symbol “F” will be 

always printed regardless of this code status when a food stamp 

taxable department is entered. 

* In Canada, some area handles two kinds of tax; GST and PST. Status 

Code 4 (Tax Print “F” Print) should be set when the GST status has 

been selected in the Status 1 Selection on the preceding page. 

Tax Symbol “T” ...... PST 

Tax Symbol “F” ...... GST 

3. When the Age Limit 1 or Age Limit 2 Status is set to ON, the age 

confirmation is always necessary before entering a sales item. Neither 

Status Code 6 (Age Limit 2 Status) nor Status Code 7 (Age Limit 1 Status) 

can be combined with Status Code 5 on the Status 1 selection (Scale 

Allowed). 

4. On the application, the Age Limit 1 Status is applied to a sales item with 

the age limit younger than that of the Age Limit 2 Status. 


- 83 - 

EO3-11070 




6 Tax Status 

• Enter a one- to four-digit Status Code for applicable Taxes. Or enter 0 if the 

department handles non-taxable items. 

[#] 

0: Non-taxable (More than one code can be entered for 

1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable) combining Tax1 to Tax4 taxable status. 

2: Tax 2 (Tax 2 taxable) For example, enter 12 to select Tax1 

3: Tax 3 (Tax 3 taxable) 


and Tax2 taxable status.) 

NOTES 1. The rate of each Tax will be later be set and described near the end of 

this chapter. 

2. In case of inclusive tax, the combination of the tax status is unavailable. 

Only one inclusive tax status can be programmed for a department. (Tax 

3 taxable or Tax 4 taxable) (Applicable for V1.9 or after) 

7 High Amount Limit 

Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the high amount to be locked out. 

Example) To prohibit any amount equal to or larger than $40.00: 

4000 [#] 

(Allows any amount equal to or smaller than $39.99.) 

NOTES 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0. 

2. The limit amount set here will be apllied to entries in REG mode only, but 

not in MGR or - mode. 

3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit. If any 

other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero. 

ex.) Entering 4001 to 4999 will all result in setting 4000. 

8 Low Amount Limit 

Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the low amount limit. 

example) To allow any amount equal to or larger than $4.00: 

400 [#] 

(Allows any amount equal to or larger than $4.00.) 

NOTES 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0. 

2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but 

not in MGR or - mode. 

3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit. If any 

other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero. 

ex.) Entering 401 to 499 will all result in setting 400. 


- 84 - 

EO3-11070 




9 Sub-link Department Code 

• This entry is useful when the department item entry should always be 

followed by another department’s item sale. If the department is not applied 

to this case, skip this address entry. Refer to the following examples of 

applications. 

HEAD-LINK DEPT. SUB-LINK DEPT. 

Example 1) Dept. 1 (for Bottle Dept. 2 (for Bottle 

Drink Net Content 

Sales entries) 

Deposit entries) 

Example 2) Dept. 14 (Batterydrive 

Clocks) 

Dept. 27 (Batteries) 

As shown in the examples, this feature prevents the cashier from forgetting to 

enter the Sub-link Dept. item attached to the Head-link Dept. item. And at the 

same time, in reports, two Department Totals are separately read. 

• In setting, enter the Sub-link Department Code (1 to 99). (The Main-link 

Dept. is the dept now being programmed.) 

[#] 

1 to 99 (Sub-link Department Code) 

• To cancel the sub-linking, enter 0 instead of the Sub-link Dept. Code before 

[#]. 

• REMARKS: 

1) When the Head-link Dept. item is entered in a sale, an entry through 

the Sub-link Dept. will be required. No other operations will be 

accepted until the Sub-link Dept. is operated. 

2) The HEAD-to-SUB linkage is effective for only one step. If the Sublink 

Dept. is further set with another Sub-link Dept., the first HEAD 

item will only require its own Sub-link Dept. entry. 

3) It is possible to set multiple departments as Head-link to one Sub-link 

Department. (For example, multiple departments are assigned for 

bottled drink entries but only one department is assigned for bottlledeposit 

entries.) 

4) The Sub-link Dept. alone may be operated for sale entries, skipping 

the Head-link Dept., without affecting the Head-link Dept. sales 

memory. 

5) Various declaration keys, multiplications, etc. may be operated on 

each of the Head-link and Sub-link depts., independently from the 

other. 


- 85 - 

EO3-11070 




(9) 6) When the [ITEM CORR] key is operated immediately after the Headlink 

item entry, the Sub-link compulsory status will also be canceled. 

7) When the [ITEM CORR] key is operated immediately after the 

compulsory Sub-link item entry, an error will result. 

8) If the Validation Compulsory or Slip Compulsory status is on either 

or both of the two depts. in the linkage, it must be operated as 

required in the ordinary timing. 

9) Repeat entries will not be allowed on either the Head-link or Sub-link 

item. 

10) Dollar Discount, %+, and %- may be operated on the Sub-link item 

as well as the Head-link item. 

11) When the Head-link dept. is programmed with “Single-item” status 

and a Single-item receipt has been issued accordingly, the Sub-link 

dept. entry will not be compulsory. 

12) An entry of any PLU linked to the Head-link dept will not require the 

Sub-link dept entry. 

13) If Store Coupon is entered through the Head-link dept, the Sub-link 

dept entry will not be compulsory. 

14) When the Sub-link dept entry is compulsory, Store Coupon may be 

entered through the Sub-link dept. 

15) When the Sub-link dept is not memory-opened, the Head-link dept 

entry will result in an error. 

- 86 - 

EO3-11070 


ex.) To program the following status and name for each department: 

DEPT Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 Address 5 Address 6 Address 7 Address 8 Adderss 9 

CODE Linked GP Dept Preset Status 1 Status 2 Tax High Low Sub-link 

Maj, Minor Name Price ON-codes ON-codes Status Amount Amount Dept. Code 

1 01 01 VEGETABLE open 45 0 1 10000 10 0 

2 01 01 FRUIT open 45 0 1 10000 50 0 

3 01 02 MEAT open 45 0 1 0 100 0 

4 01 02 FISH open 45 0 1 0 0 0 

5 01 03 DAIRY open 4 1 1 0 0 0 

6 01 04 BAKERY open 4 1 1 0 0 0 

7 02 05 CAN FOOD open 4 1 12 0 0 0 

8 02 05 BTL FOOD open 4 1 12 0 0 0 

9 02 06 DRINK open 0 1 12 0 0 10 

10 02 06 BTL DEPO open 0 0 0 100 10 0 

11 02 07 SNACK open 0 1 1 0 0 0 

12 02 07 SPICE open 0 1 1 0 0 0 

13 03 08 (DP13) open 2 0 0 0 0 0 

14 03 08 (DP14) open 1 0 0 0 0 0 

15 0 (DP15) open 3 0 0 0 0 0 

➤ 

0: Non-linked 

to any GP 

➤ 

DEPTs 13 to 15 will not 

have names programmed. 

(Standard-program 

names such as “DP13” 

will be set in this case.) 

➤ 

0: No ON-statuses 

1: S.I. 1 status 

2: S.I. 2 status 

3: Tare 3 Entry 

4: Tax Symbol “F” Print 

5: Canada Non-taxable Quantity 

6: Age Limit 2 Status 

7: Age Limit 1 Status 


1: Single-item Dept. 

2: Other Income Dept. 

3: Negative Dept. 

4: Food Stamp (or GST) 

5: Scale-allowed 

6: Gasoline Sales 

7: Validation Compulsory 

- 87 - 

0: Non-taxable 

1: Tax 1 

2: Tax 2 

3: Tax 3 

4: Tax 4 

0: No limit setting; 

The limit is ruled 

by the Common 

Dept Limit 

Amount later 

described. 

-- Refer to the KEY OPERATION on the next page for programming the above contents. -- 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

0: Non-linked to 

any Department 

EO3-11070 


KEY OPERATION: To program the data listed in the table on the preceding page: 

Mode Lock: SET, enter 3, depress [X]. 

1 [DP#] 1 [ST] 0101 [#] (Dept. 1; Address 1: Linked GP0101) 

2 [ST] 506 [#] 405 [#] 407 [#] 405 [#] 504 [#] 

401 [#] 402 [#] 412 [#] 405 [#] [ST] 

(Address 2 Name: VEGETABLE) 

3 [ST] [#] (Address 3: Preset Price...open) 

4 [ST] 45 [#] (Address 4: Food Stampable, Scalable Status) 

5 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 5: Not net to S.I.) 

6 [ST] 1 [#] (Address 6: Tax 1 status) 

7 [ST] 10000 [#] (Address 7: High Amount Prohibited) 

8 [ST] 10 [#] (Address 8: Low Amount Allowed) 

9 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 9: No Sub-link Dept.) 

..... 

15 [DP#] 1 [ST] 0 [#] (Dept. 15: Address 1: No linked GP) 

3 [ST] [#] (Address 3: Preset Price...open) 

4 [ST] 3 [#] (Address 4: Negative Dept. status) 

5 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 5: Not net to S.I.) 

6 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 6: Non-taxable status) 

7 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 7: High Amount free) 

8 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 8: Low Amount free) 

9 [ST] 0 [#] (Address 9: No Sub-link Dept.) 


NOTES 1) In this example, the Address Designation feature is not used. 

- 88 - 

EO3-11070 


2) In this example, the Dept. Code is entered through the [DP#] key; however, it can be replaced 

by depressing the actual Dept Code-preset key instead, if that Department Key exists on the 

keyboard (which is applicable to the Ordinary Keyboard Type). Only to open the memory of a 

department: 

3 [X] ➤ |Department Code| [DP#] ➤ 

[AT/TL] 

➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P03 

01DP01 

#01 0101 

#02 VEGETABLE 

#03 

#04 45 

#05 0 

#06 1 

#07 100.00 

#08 0.10 

15DP15 

#01 0000 

#03 

#04 3 

#05 0 

#06 0 

#07 0.00 

#08 0.00 

#09 00 

3) If the Dept. Code is sequential from the previous one, the Dept. Code before the [DP#] can be 

omitted. 

4) If the Address No. is sequential from the previous one, the Address No. + [ST] may be omitted. 

(In the above example, all address entries are not omitted for an easy understanding of the 

sample operation.) 

5) For the name setting (Address 2), the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method has been used. But 

the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method is also possible if you have any of FLAT KEYBOARD, 

PLU KEYBOARD (PK-2), and PROGRAMMING KEYBOARD (TKB-1). Refer to the CHARAC- 

TER ENTRIES at the beginning of this chapter. 

0025

Deletion 

CONDITION After Department and PLU Daily and GT Resets 


Individual Department Deletion 

[ITEM CORR] ➤ [DEPT] 

3 [X] ➤ or ➤ [AT/TL] 

[VOID] ➤ 

|Department Code| [DP#] 

.... 

Submode No. 

➤ 

All Department Deletion 

Repeatable for other depts to be deleted. 

3 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 

➤ [ALL VOID] ➤ [AT/TL] 

.... 

Submode No. 

- 89 - 

EO3-11070 


PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4) 

- 90 - 

EO3-11070B 


This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be changed, or 

PLUs are to be deleted. 

Programming or Changing 



Submode No. 

EE 

Repeat for 

other 

PLUs. 

As for details of each Address, 

refer to the following pages. 





the same PLU 


correction. 

(NOTE 3 ). 

[ST] 

Address 1: Link Department 

1 [ST] 

Address 2: PLU Name 

2 [ST] 


3 [ST] 


4 [ST] 


5 [ST] 


6 [ST] 

Address 7: Unit Price of Indiv. 

Split Package for HI-CONE PLU 

or Tare 2 Rate 

7 [ST] 

Address 8: Whole Package Quantity 

8 [ST] 

Address 9: PLU Group No. 

9 [ST] 

Address 10: Link-PLU Table No. 

10 [ST] 

Address 11: Tare Table No. 

11 [ST] 

Address 12: Unit Weight or 

Dollar Discount/Extra 

Charge Code 

12 [ST] 

Address 13: Mix & Match Group No. 

13 [ST] 



Barcode Scanning 

|PLU Code| [PLU] 

for sequential-coded item only 

|Department Code| [#] 

(1 to 99) 



|Price| [#] 







|Unit Price or Tare 2 Rate| [#] 


|Whole Package Quantity| [#] 


|PLU Group No.| [#] 

(1 to 99; 0 to reset) 

|Link-PLU Table No.| [#] 


|Tare Table No.| [#] 


|Unit Weight Table Code or Dollar 

Discount/Extra Charge Code| [#] 


|Mix & Match Group No.| [#] 

(1 to 255; 0 to reset)

- 91 - 

EO3-11070B 


NOTES: 1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered, 

the designated Address(es) will automatically be accessed after the PLU Code designation. (The 

idea is the same as the Address Nos Designation in the DEPARTMENT PROGRAMMING 

operation.) 

2. A maximum of 65,000 PLUs are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and allocation 

of the RAM). Also refer to the “CODING PLUs” to be described at the end of this section. The 

“[PLU]” key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU” but not any PLU Preset-code Keys. 

To program bar code scanning, the expansion memory should be installed. 

3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation 

feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted. 

4. The programming contents of each address are further described in the PLU TABLE PROGRAM- 

MING CONTENTS below. 

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS 


1 Linked Department Code 

Enter the 2-digit code of the department to which the PLU is linked. When the 

PLU is newly programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result if this 

entry is skipped.) 

[#] 

1 to 99 

2 PLU Name (Descriptor) 

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the 

CHARACTER ENTRIES at the beginning of this chapter. End with [ST]. 

When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-program 

name for printing: 

PLUxxxxxx (for PLU Code Max. 6-digit feature) 

PLUxxxxxxxxxxxxx (for PLU Code Max. 13-digit feature) 

(The “PLU” portion is programmable in the PRINT LINE ITEM NAME 

PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 10. “xx ... x” is the PLU Code.) 

3 Preset Price 

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and 

depress [#]. 

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99) 

When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed” is selected, the 

decimal digit can be entered after entering a maximum of 5 integer digits and 

the [•] key. 

1 to 99999 (result: $0.01 to $999.99) 

or 

0.1 to 99999.9 (result: $0.001 to $999.999) 

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation. 

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the 

PLU will be an open PLU (open-price PLU). 





• Enter the Status Codes 1 to 7 whose status must be set to ON side. More than 

one code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set 

to ON. However, the Scale-Compulsory Status (Code 5) and HI-CONE 

Status (Code 6) cannot be combined for one PLU. 


Code OFF ON 

1 Quantity Entry 


Optional Compulsory 

2 Net to S.I. 1 ? No Yes 

3 Net to S.I. 2 ? No Yes 

4 Food Stamp (or GST) Status? No Yes 

5 Scale Entry Prohibited Compulsory 

6 HI-CONE Status? No Yes 

7 Lock or Unlock Unlock (in use) Lock (not in use) 

8 Delete the PLU? No Yes 

NOTES: 

• When the Quantity Entry Compulsory Status (Code 1) is selected, the 

quantity entry is always necessary for PLU item entry. However, if the 

[PACK] or [3rd PRICE] key is depressed, this compulsory status will be 

ignored. 

• Net to S.I. 1, 2 ... Refer to the section of PRESET RATE SETTING FOR 

SELECTIVE ITEMIZERS near the end of this chapter. 

• The HI-CONE Status (Code 6) is effective only with the Scanning feature. 

• The HI-CONE Status (Code 6) requires setting of the Whole Package 

Quantity (Address 8). 

• The Delete Status set is possible only when the PLU center file is 

selected. 

Setting Examples: 

To set only Status 2 to ON .............. Enter 2 [#] 

To set Statuses 2, 3, 5 to ON .......... Enter 235 [#] 

To set none of statuses to ON ........ Enter 0 [#] 


- 92 - 

EO3-11070B 





• Enter the Status Codes 2 to 7 (Code 3 is vacant.) whose status must be set 

to ON side. More than one code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the 

statuses should be set to ON. However, the Age Limit 2 or Age Limit 1 Status 

(Code 6 or 7) is unavailable for the Scale Entry Compulsory PLU (Code 5 in 

Status 1 Selection). 


Code OFF ON 

1 Price Print Print Non-print 

2 Tare 3 Entry Optional Compulsory 


4 Tax Symbol “F” Print 


Non-print Print 

5 Canada Non-taxable Quantity 


Not objective Objective 


(Applicable for V2.0 or after) (Age Confirmation) (Age Confirmation) 


(Applicable for V2.0 or after) (Age Confirmation) (Age Confirmation) 

NOTES: 1) Tax symbol “F” is printed when this status code has been set 

“ON” to a taxable PLU. 

• If the GST feature has been selected, this symbol “F” will 

be always printed regardless of this code status when a 

GST taxable PLU is entered. 

• If the Food Stamp feature has been selected, this symbol 

“F” will be always printed regardless of this code status 

when a food stamp taxable PLU is entered. 

* In Canada, some area handles two kinds of tax; GST and 

PST. Status Code 4 (Tax Print “F” Print) should be set 

when the GST status has been selected in the Status 1 

Selection on the preceding page. 

Tax Symbol “T” ...... PST 

Tax Symbol “F” ...... GST 

2) When the Price Print Status (Code 1) is set to ON (Non-print), 

PLU price will not be printed. However, when the Quantity 

Extension transaction is performed for the PLU, its price will be 

always printed regardless of this status selection. 

Do not set this status code ON. 

3) On the application, the Age Limit 1 Status is applied to a sales 

item with the age limit younger than that of the Age Limit 2 Status. 


- 93 - 

EO3-11070B 




6 Tax Status 

• Enter one- to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Taxes. 

[#] 

0: Non-taxable (More than one code can be entered for 

1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable) combining Tax1 to Tax4 taxable status. 

2: Tax 2 (Tax 2 taxable) For example, enter 12 to select Tax1 

3: Tax 3 (Tax 3 taxable) and Tax2 taxable status.) 


NOTE: In case of inclusive tax, the combination of the tax status is unavailable. Only 

one inclusive tax status can be programmed for a PLU. (Tax 3 taxable or Tax 

4 taxable) (Applicable for V1.9 or after) 

7 Unit Price of Individual Split Package 

(for HI-CONE PLUs only; on V2.0 or after, the unit price of individual split package 

can be programmed regardless of the HI-CONE status.) 

• For preset the unit price of individual split package, enter a maximum of 6digit 

price, and depress [#]. 

• To cancel the unit price of individual split package, enter 0 and depress [#]. 

(When the unit price of individual split package is not preset (or 0), whole 

package price (Address 3 setting) will be used in the registration. 

Tare 2 Rate 

If the scale status is set, and there is any value in this area, Tare 2 rate is used. 

(0 to 9999; 0% to 99.99%) 

8 Whole Package Quantity (for Split Package Pricing PLUs) 

[#] 

Enter the whole package quantity in max. 2 digits (1 to 99), or enter 0 to cancel 

the Split Package Pricing status. Be sure to set a whole package quantity here 

for PLUs with HI-CONE Status (Address 4 - Code 6) or Mix & Match Group No. 

(Address 13). 

NOTES: • This setting is not allowed for PLUs with the Scale-compulsory status. 

• When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit” is selected, this 

setting is not allowed to any PLUs. 


- 94 - 

EO3-11070B 




9 PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports) 

• Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU belongs, 

and depress [#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and depress [#]. 

• The name of each PLU Group will be programmed in Submode 29. 

10 Link-PLU Table No. (for PLU-to-PLU linking requirement only) 

• This entry is useful, similar to the “Sub-link Dept.” feature in the DEPART- 

MENT TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, when the PLU item entry should 

always be followed by another PLU item sale. If the PLU is not applied to this 

case, skip this address entry. Refer to the following examples of applications: 

HEAD-LINK PLU SUB-LINK PLU 

Example 1) PLU 1: Coca-Cola PLU 2: Bottle 

Small Bottle Deposit for the 

Net Content small bottle 

at $0.45 at $0.05 

Example 2) PLU 101: Battery- PLU 101: Batterydrive 

Clock Pack at $1.50 

at $20.00 

As shown in the examples, this feature prevents the cashier from forgetting to 

enter the Sub-link PLU item attached to the Head-link PLU item. And at the same 

time, in reports, two PLU Totals are separately read. 

• In setting, enter the Link-PLU Table No. (1 to 99) and then depress [#]. 

[#] 

1 to 99 (Link-PLU Table No. The Sub-link PLU which link to the Link-PLU Table will be 

programmed in a separate programming operation later.) 

• To cancel the sub-linking, enter 0 instead of the Link-PLU Table No. before 

[#]. 

• REMARKS: 

1) When the Head-link PLU is entered in a sale, the Sub-link PLU will 

automatically be entered. When the Sub-link PLU is an open-price 

PLU, the price entry and the [AMT] key depression should follow 

manually on the main keyboard. This manual operation sequence 

cannot be replaced by a PLU Preset-code Key on the main keyboard 

or on the PK-2 keyboard. 

2) The PLU-to-PLU linkage is effective even when the Head-link PLU 

is an open-price PLU. 


- 95 - 

EO3-11070B 




(10) 

- 96 - 

EO3-11070B 


(Revision Date: Aug. 11, ‘98) 

3) The linkage is effective in a sale only for one Head-link PLU and one 

Sub-link PLU. If the Sub-link PLU is further programmed with 

another Sub-link PLUs (with a Link-PLU Table No.), the third PLU will 

not automatically entered. 

4) It is possible to set multiple PLUs as Head-link to one Sub-link PLU. 

(In Example 1 described above, it may be extended to have more 

Head-link PLUs of similar items such as 7-up, which also link to the 

Bottle Deposit of the same amount.) 

5) Repeat, Item Correct, Dollar Discount, Vendor Coupon, Bottle Return, 

%+, or %- operations are not accepted for PLU-to-PLU link 

entries. But Return Merchandise or Void operation is possible for the 

Head-link (and the Sub-link PLU will be processed as returned or 

voided item automatically, in this case). 

6) The Sub-link PLU may be operated for sales entries, skipping the 

Head-link PLU, without affecting the Head-link PLU sales memory. 

7) Multiplication is possible on the Head-link PLU, and then the Sub-link 

PLU will automatically be multiplied with the same quantity. 

8) Modifier Keys (such as [SI/M]) will be effective for the Head-link PLU 

item only, and the modification will be disregarded for the Sub-link 

PLU. 

9) When an error occurs at the Sub-link PLU, only the Head-link PLU 

is entered but not the Sub-link PLU. (Errors such as Multiplication 

Product Over-limit Error, the Sub-link PLU has not been opened, the 

sale subtotal will turn into negative, etc.) 

10) When the Sub-link is a negative PLU, a Return Merchandise or Void 

entry through the Head-link PLU is not possible. 

11) None of Scale-Compulsory PLUs should be linked as Sub-link to 

another PLU of Head-link. An error will result on the Head-link item 

entry attempt in this case. 

12) When a price-change entry is made (using the [PR OPEN] or 

[OPEN] key) through the Head-link PLU, the Sub-link PLU will 

always require a manual amount entry (through [AMT]) even when 

the Sub-link is a preset-price PLU. 

13) PLU with the Age Limit Status programmed cannot be used for Link- 

PLU. 




11 Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only) 

[#] 

Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later in 

a separate operation (submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a Tare 

Table No. set, the tare weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically be 

subtracted from the total weight read from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a Tare 

Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for PLUs not needing any tare 

weight calculations. 

12 Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only) 

[#] 

LB unit Kg unit 

0: General Unit Weight (Set in Submode 26) 

1: 1 LB 1 Kg 

2: 2 LB 2 Kg 

3: 3 LB 3 Kg 

4: 4 LB 4 Kg 

5: 5 LB 5 Kg 

6: 6 LB 6 Kg 

7: 7 LB 7 Kg 

8: 8 LB 8 Kg 

9: 9 LB 9 Kg 

10: 1/2 LB 100 g 

11: 1/4 LB not applicable 

NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a system 

option selection. 

Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code 

Enter the Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code (1 to 99), then depress the [#] 

key. Enter 0 as the Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code to reset the code once 

programmed. 

13 Mix & Match Group No. 

[#] 

Enter the Mix & Match Group No. (1 to 255). To cancel the Mix & Match Group 

once set, enter 0. 

NOTE: This Mix & Match Group No. setting is only possible when a Whole Package 

Quantity (Address 8) is set. 

- 97 - 

EO3-11070B 


ADDITIONAL NOTES 

- 98 - 

EO3-11070B 


If a PLU is linked to a negative Department, the PLU is automatically set as negative PLU. If a PLU is linked 

to an Other Income Department, the PLU is automatically set as Other Income PLU. 

When a negative PLU is set with the Scale-Compulsory status, an error will result in a sale entry attempt of 

that PLU. 

The Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU is ruled by that of its linked 

department. 

When a PLU is linked to a Gasoline Sales Department, an error will result in a sale entry attempt of that PLU. 

The system option allows you to select that the Tax Status and the Food Stamp Status of each PLU are 

determined by those of its link department on V2.0 or after.

ex.) To program the following PLUs: 

➤ 

➤ 

0: Non-taxable 

1: Add-on Tax 1 





1: Quantity Entry Compulsory Status 

2: Net to S.I. 1 

3: Net to S.I. 2 

4: Food Stamp (or GST) Status 

5: Scale-Compulsory 

6: HI-CONE Status 

7: Lock (not in use) status 

- 99 - 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 9 

EO3-11070B 


PLU Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address 

CODE 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

Linked PLU Preset Status- Tax HI-CONE Whole PLU Link-PLU Tare Indiv. PLU M & M 

Dept. Name Price ON Status Unit Package Group Table Table Unit Weight Group 

Code codes Price Q’ty No. No. No. Table Code No. 

10101 1 Tomato 1.00 4 1 6 1 --- 

10102 1 Potato 0.80 4 1 6 1 --- 

20101 2 Orange 0.75 4 1 4 1 --- 

20102 2 Lemon 1.00 4 1 4 1 --- 

20105 2 Apple 0.90 4 0 4 1 --- 

30301 3 Beef 2.50 45 0 3 --- 2 1 

30302 3 Pork 2.00 45 0 3 --- 2 1 

30303 3 Mutton 1.80 45 1 3 --- 2 1 

40201 4 Salmon 0.75 45 1 2 --- 1 1 

40202 4 Cod 0.40 45 0 2 --- 1 1 

40203 4 Shrimp 0.60 45 1 2 --- 1 1 

50301 5 Milk-Large Pack 1.30 24 1 3 --- 

50302 5 Milk-Small Pack 0.40 24 1 3 --- 

50303 5 Nonfat-Milk Pack 1.10 24 1 3 --- 

50321 5 Cheese-Half Pck 2.50 24 1 3 --- 

50322 5 Eggs-6 Pack open 24 0 3 --- 

60401 6 White Bread Loaf 1.20 24 1 4 --- 

60402 6 Rye Bread Loaf 1.20 24 1 4 --- 

60403 6 Soft Rolls-6 0.90 24 0 4 --- 

60404 6 Hard Rolls-4 0.80 24 0 4 --- 

70501 7 Tuna Can 1.00 246 0 0.40 3 5 --- 1 

70502 7 Soup Can 1.00 246 0 0.40 3 5 --- 1 

80501 8 Strawberry Jam 4.40 246 1 1.11 4 5 --- 

80502 8 Kiwi Jam 2.20 246 0 1.11 2 5 --- 

80503 8 Pickles 1.20 24 0 5 --- 

90601 9 Coke Small-B 0.60 2 1 6 1 

90701 9 7-up Small-B 0.60 2 1 7 1 

101301 10 Small-Btl Depo 0.05 0 1 13 --- 

110501 11 Potato Chips 1.50 2 0 5 --- 

120501 12 Nutmeg 0.60 2 0 5 --- 

➤ 

xx xx xx PLU Coding Method in this example: 

Serial No. 00 to 99: 

Wholesaler Code 00 to 99 

Link Department Code 1 to 60 

Refer to “CODING PLUs” on the page after next. 

-- KEY OPERATION is on the next page -- 

➤ 

➤ 

1 to 255 

0: General 

1: 1LB/1Kg 

2: 2LB/2Kg 

. 

9: 9LB/9Kg 

10: 1/2LB/100g 

11: 1/4LB/not 

applicable

KEY OPERATION: for programming some of the PLUs listed on the preceding page. 

(Presumed that the following PLUs are newly programmed.) 


10101 [PLU] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (PLU Code; Linked Dept) 

2 [ST] 504 [#] 615 [#] 613 [#] 601 [#] 

704 [#] 615 [#] [ST] (Name: Tomato) 

3 [ST] 100 [#] (Preset Price / LB=unit weight) 

4 [ST] 4 [#] (ON-status Codes: Food Stampable) 

6 [ST] 1 [#] (Tax 1 taxable) 

8 [ST] 6 [#] (Whole Package Quantity is 6) 

9 [ST] 1 [#] (PLU Group No.) 

..... 


2 [ST] 403 [#] 615 [#] 611 [#] 605 [#] [#] 503 [#] 613 [#] 

601 [#] 612 [#] 612 [#] 213 [#] 402 [#] [ST] 

(Name: Coke Small-B) 

3 [ST] 60 [#] (Preset Price / one-bottle net) 

4 [ST] 2 [#] (ON-status Codes; Net to S.I. 1) 



10 [ST] 1 [#] (Link-PLU Table No.) 

..... ..... 


2 [ST] 503 [#] 613 [#] 601 [#] 612 [#] 612 [#] 213 [#] 

402 [#] 704 [#] 612 [#] [#] 404 [#] 605 [#] 700 [#] 

615 [#] [ST] (Name: Small-Btl Depo) 

3 [ST] 5 [#] (Preset Price / bottle) 

4 [ST] 0 [#] (ON-status Codes; no ON-statuses) 



[AT/TL] to end 

- 100 - 

EO3-11070B 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P04 

010101 

PLU010101 

#01 01 

#02 Tomato 

#03 1.00 @ 

#04 4 

#05 0 

#06 1 

#08 6 

#09 01 

090601 

PLU090601 

#01 09 

#02 Coke Small-B 

#03 0.60 @ 

#04 2 

#05 0 

#06 1 

#09 06 

101301 

PLU101301 

#01 10 

#02 Small-Btl Depo 

#03 0.05 @ 

#04 0 

#05 0 

#06 1 

#09 13 

00030 

0026

Deletion 

CONDITION To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale 

To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset 


Individual PLU Deletion 

4 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 

➤ |PLU Code| [PLU] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

ex.) To delete PLU No. 90701 (7-up Small-B) that was once programmed: 

All PLU Deletion 

Repeatable for another PLU to be deleted. 

Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X] 

[ITEM CORR] 90701 [PLU] 

[AT/TL] 


4 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 


- 101 - 

➤ 

EO3-11070B 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P04 

090701 

7-up Small-B 

------------------------ 

00029 

0028

PLU Programmed Data Copying 

- 102 - 

EO3-11070B 


This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming another PLU item, 

thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation. 

CONDITION To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs: 

Any time outside a sale (except the following case) 

To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero: 

After PLU Reset 


4 [X] |PLU Code of the copy-destination| [PLU] [NS] 

|PLU Code of the copy-source| [PLU] 

The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied to the copydestination 

PLU (except the PLU Code). Then follow the procedure on the 

page of Programming or Changing to change data of any required 

Addresses. 

ex.) To program PLU 90701 (7-up Small-B) again that was once programmed and then deleted, by copying the 

programmed data of PLU 90601 (Coke Small-B): 


90701 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-destination) 

[NS] 

90601 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-source) 

2 [ST] 307 [#] 213 [#] 705 [#] 700 [#] [#] 503 [#] 613 [#] 601 [#] 

612 [#] 612 [#] 213 [#] 402 [#] [ST] 

(Address 2, Name changed into: 7-up Small-B) 

9 [ST] 7 [#] (Address 9, PLU Group No. changed into: 7) 

[AT/TL] (to end this submode) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

090701 

2 

#00 090601 

P04 

#02 7-up Small-B 

#09 07 

00030 30000 

0030

CODING PLUs (supplement to PLU programming operations) 

- 103 - 

EO3-11070B 


A maximum of 6-digit or 13-digit No. may be assigned to each PLU as PLU Code, depending on the system 

option selection of the PLU Code digits. Any number within this limit may be assigned to each PLU. The 

following description is applied to the “Manual PLU Entry System Type”. When the “Scanning System Type” 

is selected, refer to the Scanning Specifications in the SYSTEM EXPLANATION separately issued. 

DIGIT LENGTH OF PLU CODES 

In determining the actual digit length of PLU codes, refer to the following factors: 

1) The smaller the digit length, the easier and quicker the PLU sales entries will be. 

2) The larger the digit length, the more precise analysis will be possible using various report functions. 

3) Some stores may adopt PLU Codes of more than 2 digits (while 1- or 2-digit codes are given to 

Departments), to prevent confusions or mistakes in key operations. 

4) Some stores may use smaller-digit codes for frequently sold PLU items while using larger-digit code for 

slow-sale items. 

CODING METHODS 

For the purpose of classifying merchandise and for convenience of PLU report applications, any of the following 

methods may be taken according to each store’s requirement: 

1. Coding With Linked Department Code 

In this method, the PLU’s linked Department Code should be contained in the PLU Code. 

ex.) Department Code Its Linking PLU Codes 

0 100, 101, 102, 103 ... 199 

12 1200, 1201, 1202, 1203 ... 1299 

If the linked Department Code is contained in the top 2 digits of the PLU code, as in the above examples, 

the following merits are expected: 

1) The store cashiers and other clerks may easily see each PLU’s link Department. 

2) In PLU report takings, “Zone PLU Read/Reset” reports are effective, by designating the zone of 

all the PLUs that link to the same Department. 

ex.) To read all the PLUs linked to Dept. 12: 

Zone-start PLU Code ..... 1200 

Zone-end PLU Code ...... 1299 

(For more details, refer to the report section in the Owner’s Manual.) 

2. Coding With Type ID for Each Digit 

This method is to give each digit numeric of the PLU code a certain meaning according to the 

merchandise, color, grade, size, wholesaler, etc.

- 104 - 

EO3-11070B 


Example using 4-digit codes) -- in case of a clothing shop -- 

2 1 3 0 

Merchandise serial No. assigned under the same number of the preceding digits. 

Size ID (1 for Small, 2 for Medium, 3 for Large, etc.) 

Color ID (0 for White, 1 for Gray, 2 for Black, etc.) 

Wholesaler or Maker ID (1 for Company “A”, 2 for Company “B”, etc.) 

3. Using Bar codes (source-marking EAN or UPC bar codes) 

If most of the sale items in the store are printed with a source-marking UPC bar codes, the code (the 

human-readable numerics attached to the bar code print) may be entered as it is. Some items are 

printed with 13-digit code, and others with 8-digit code. Thus this method is possible only when the 

option “PLU Code max. 13 digits” is selected. 

The merit of this system is that you can simply read and enter the source-marked code rather than 

generating an original code for each PLU item. If the barcode No. is used, however, it is recommended 

to adopt the “Scanning System Type”. 

4. Combining Methods 1, 2, and 3 

When the option “PLU Code max. 13 digits” is selected, some combinations of the above three methods 

are possible. 

Example 1) Combining Methods 1 and 2: 

x x x x x x 

Type IDs described in Method 2 

Linked Department Code described in Method 1 

Example 2) Combining Methods 3, and Method 1 or 2: 

For source-marked items ... use the bar codes. 

For other items ... generate codes in Method 1 or Method 2, in max. 6 or 7 digits for example. 

After all, the methods described above are only suggestions. You may freely make up your own PLU coding 

method to suit each store’s merchandise controls.

TIME SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT (Submode 5) 



5 [X] |Hour| |Minute| [AT/TL] 

(0 to 23) (00 to 59) 

NOTE: If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of more than 59 

is entered, it will result in an error. The current date will not be 

changed by setting or adjusting the time. 

ex.) To set the time to “1:35 p.m. (13:35)”: 


Enter 1335, depress [AT/TL]. 

DATE SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT (Submode 6) 



6 [X] |Day-of-Week Code| Month| |Day| |Year| [AT/TL] 

(01 to 12) (01 to 31) (94, 95, etc.) 

0: SUN (Sunday) 

1: MON (Monday) 

2: TUE (Tuesday) 

3: WED (Wednesday) 

4: THU (Thursday) 

5: FRI (Friday) 

6: SAT (Saturday) 

ex.) To set the date to Monday, December 19 1994: 


Enter 1 1 2 1 9 1 9 9 4, depress [AT/TL]. 

- 105 - 

EO3-11070B 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P05 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P06 

1 12-19-1994 

NOTES: 1. The date entry order may be Day-Month-Year or Year-Month-Day instead of Month-Day-Year if 

so selected in the system option. 

2. If you do not want to print the Day-of-Week on receipts, set blanks as characters of the name of 

each Day-of-Week in Submode 10. 

0032 

0033 

13:35TM

HOURLY RANGE SETTING (Submode 7) (for report purposes) 

CONDITION After Hourly Range Reset 


7 [X] ➤ |Hour| |Minute| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

Enter the time that ends 

each hourly range, in 

the 24-hour system. 

Repeat until all the hourly ranges are 

entered. (max. 24 hourly ranges) 

(After a RAM Clear, no Hourly Ranges are set as Initial data.) 

ex.) To reset the hourly range table that has been programmed: 


Enter 0, depress [#]. 

Depress [AT/TL]. 

ex.) To set the following hourly range table: 

TABLE KEY OPERATION 

Mode Lock to SET. 


1) up to 8:00* Enter 800, depress [#]. 

2) 8:00 to 12:00 Enter 1200, depress [#]. 



* (The first hourly range is Depress [AT/TL] to end this 

automatically continued 

from 19:00 of the preceding 

day.) 

submode. 

- 106 - 

TEC 11-14-1994 STORE MON #1 


PHONE: 87-6437 P07 

EO3-11070B 


NOTES: 

1. A maximum of 24 hourly ranges 

can be set. 

2. To change the table of hourly 

ranges once set, partially or entirely, 

do the entire setting operation 

over again. 

3. To reset the hourly range table 

once set, operate: 


7 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL] 

Then no hourly range sales data 

will be outputted on the reports. 

4. Do not set an hourly range 

across 24:00, such as “from 

23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will 

be processed into that hourly 

range. 

5. If a time value of more than 

24:00 is set, no error results. But 

the sales data will not be processed 

in this case. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



Open 8:00am to 7:00pm 00:00TM 


0034 

11-14-1994 MON #1 

P07 

0036 

08:00TM 

12:00TM 

15:00TM 

19:00TM

AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING FOR FUNCTION KEYS (Submode 8) 

- 107 - 

EO3-11070B 


This submode sets the high amount limit in finalizing transactions by tendering through each media key and also 

sets the high and low amount limits in entering amount through departments. 



8 [X] ➤ |Key Code| [ST] 

(See the table below.) 

➤ |Amount Limit Set Value| [#] 

Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset 

➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

Key 

Code Item or Key to be applied 

1 [AT/TL] (Cash Tender) 

2 [CHK TEND] (Check Tender) 

3 [Chg] (Charge Tender) 

4 [MISC TEND] (Misc. Tender) 

5 [CPN] (Media-Coupon Tender) 

6 [CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender) 

Repeat for another key. 

Key 

Code Item or Key to be applied 




10 [FSTL TEND] (Food Stamp Tender) 

11 Common High Limit for all depts. 

12 Common Low Limit for all depts. 

NOTES: 1. As for “Common High Limit for all depts.” and “Common Low Limit for all depts.,” the same is 

applied as Addresses 7 and 8 of DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 3). 

2. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of a department has been set (in Submode 3), it prevails 

over the Common High or Low Limit for all departments here. 

3. The Amount Limit Set Value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is effective only 

when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total key. Different from amount 

limit setting of departments, an exact value on all the digits can be set for tendering media. For 

example, if you enter 1234 [#], an amount up to $12.34 can be tendered. 

ex.) To set the Amount Limits of the following items: 

Key Code Amount Limit Set Value 

2 ([CHK TEND]) $99.99 9999 

11 (Common High) $999.99 100000 

12 (Common Low) $0.01 1 

Mode Lock: SET, 8 [X] 

2 [ST] (Item Code for Cheque Media Key) 

9999 [#] 

11 [ST] 100000 [#] (Common High Limit for all depts.) 

12 [ST] 1 [#] (Common Low Limit for all depts.) 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P08 

#02 CHECK 99.99 

#11 1000.00 

#12 0.01 

0037

FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 9) 

- 108 - 

EO3-11070 


In this operation, the item names printed in Financial Reports are programmed. Many of them are also used to 

print in sales receipts. Other line items merely used in receipts or others than listed here will be programmed in 

Submode 10. 

CONDITION After Financial Daily and GT Resets 


➤ 

Repeat for other items. 

➤ 

9 [X] ➤ |Item Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(See the table on the 

following pages.) 

* 


(See NOTE 1) 

........ 

Indicates the end of 

each item name 

(any unprogrammed 

parts will be filled 

with blanks.) 

* For sequentially 

programming items, the 

item code specification 

can be skipped. 

NOTES: 1. As for most items, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be 

programmed for one item name. The following items are exceptions, and a maximum of 6 regularsized 

or 3 double-sized characters may be programmed for each: 

Item Codes 4, 5, 16, 17, 20, 32 to 35, 47, 48, 50, 54, 56 

Also refer to CHARACTER ENTRIES at the beginning of this chapter. 

2. As shown in the table on the next pages, the Standard Program data are preprogrammed (which 

is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the items that need to be changed. 

ex.) To program “NS1” instead of “NS” for Item Code 6 (Net Sale Without Tax), and “NS2” instead of “NS” 

for Item Code 13 (Net Sale With Tax) all in double-sized Characters: 


6 [ST] (Item Code) 

[X] [X] (all double-size declaration) 

414 [#] 503 [#] 301 [#] [ST] (Name: NS1) 

13 [ST] (Item Code) 

[X] [X] (all double-size declaration) 

414 [#] 503 [#] 302 [#] [ST] (Name: NS2) 

[AT/TL] to complete this submode 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P09 

#006NS1 

#013NS2 

0038

FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME TABLE 

Item Total/Counter Name Standard Program 

Code 

1 Grand Total G | T | | | | | | | | 

2 NET GT N|E|T| |G|T| | | | | | 

3 Gross Sale G | S | | | | | | | | 

4 % + (% I) %|+| | | | | 

5 % + (% II) %|+| |II| | | 

6 Net Sale Without Tax N | S | | | | | | | | 

7 GST G|S|T| | | | | | | | | 

8 Tax 1 T|A|X|1| | | | | | | | 

9 Tax 2 T|A|X|2| | | | | | | | 

10 Tax 3 T|A|X|3| | | | | | | | 

11 Tax 4 T|A|X|4| | | | | | | | 

12 Manual Tax (Tax 5) T|A|X|5| | | | | | | | 

13 Net Sale With Tax N | S | | | | | | | | 

14 Positive Other Income Depts. H|A|S|H| |D|P| | | | | 

15 Negative Other Income Depts. -|H|A|S|H| |D|P| | | | 

16 % - on Subtotal (% I) %|-| | | | | 

17 % - on Subtotal (% II) %|-| | | | | 

18 Vendor Coupon V|.|C|P|N| | | | | | | 

19 Discount on Subtotal D|I|S|C| | | | | | | | 

20 Bottle Return B|T|R| | | | 

21 All Media Sales T|O|T|A|L| | | | | | | 

22 Cash Sales (AT/TL) C|A|S|H| | | | | | | | 

23 Media 1 Sales (CHK) C|H|E|C|K| | | | | | | 

24 Media 2 Sales (Chg) C|h|g| | | | | | | | | 

25 Media 3 Sales (MISC) M|I|S|C| | | | | | | | 

26 Media 4 Sales (Credit 1) C|R|E|D|I|T| |1| | | | 


28 Media 6 Sales (Debit) D|E|B|I|T| | | | | | | 

29 Media 7 Sales (EBT Cash) E|B|T| |C|A|S|H| | | | 

30 Media 8 Sales (EBT F/S) E|B|T| |F|/|S| | | | | 

31 Food Stamp Sales F|S| |T|L| | | | | | | 

32 Received-on-Account R|/|A| | | | 

33 Paid-Out P|O| | | | | 

34 Loan L|O|A|N| | | 

35 Pick Up P|I|C|K|U|P| 

36 Cash-in-drawer C|A|S|H| |I|D| | | | | 

37 Media 1-in-drawer (CHK) C|H|E|C|K| |I|D| | | | 

38 Media 2-in-drawer (Chg) C|h|g| |I|D| | | | | | 

39 Media 3-in-drawer (MISC) M|I|S|C| |I|D| | | | | 

40 Media 4-in-drawer (Credit 1) C|R|T| |I|D|1| | | | | 


42 Media 6-in-drawer (Debit) D|E|B|I|T| |I|D| | | | 

43 Media 7-in-drawer (EBT Cash) E|B|T| |C|A|S|H| |I|D| 

- 109 - 

EO3-11070 


FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME TABLE (Continued) 

Item 

Code 

Total/Counter Name Standard Program 

44 Media 8-in-drawer (EBT F/S) E|B|T| |F|/|S| |I|D| | 

45 Food Stamp-in-drawer F|S|I|D| | | | | | | | 

46 Food Stamp CHANGE F|S| |C|G| | | | | | | 

47 Item Correct C|O|R|R| | | 

48 Void V|O|I|D| | | 

49 Misc. Void M|I|S|C| |V|D| | | | | 

50 All Void A|L|L| |V|D| 

51 % - on Line Items (%I) %|-| | | | | | | | | | 

52 % - on Line Items (%II) %|-| | | | | | | | | | 

53 Dollar Discount on Line Items D|I|S|C| | | | | | | | 

54 Store Coupon S|.|C|P|N| | 

55 Negative Depts. Total -|D|P| |T|L| | | | | | 

56 Returned Merchandise R|T|N| | | | 

57 Negative Tax -|T|A|X| | | | | | | | 

58 Negative Sales Total -|S|A|L|E| | | | | | | 

59 Negative Mode Total R|E|G|-| | | | | | | | 

60 Transfer Balance GT T|R|F| |T|L| | | | | | 

61 Transfer + Daily T|R|F|+| |G|T| | | | | 

62 Transfer - Daily T|R|F|-| |G|T| | | | | 

63 Transfer + Daily T|R|F|+| | | | | | | | 

64 Transfer - Daily T|R|F|-| | | | | | | | 

65 PB (Previous Balance) Sales P|B| |T|L| | | | | | | 

66 PB R/A (PB Paid) P|B| |R|/|A| | | | | | 

67 PB PO (PB Refunded) P|B| |P|O| | | | | | | 

68 GST Taxable Total G|S|T| |T|X|B|L| | | | 

69 Taxable Total 1 T|X|B|L|1| | | | | | | 




73 Selective Itemizer Total 1 S|I|1| |T|L| | | | | | 


75 Tax-exempt Customer T|A|X| |E|X| | | | | | 

76 GST Exempted Sales G|S|T| |E|X| | | | | | 

77 Tax 1 Exempted Sales T|A|X|1|E|X| | | | | | 




81 FS Amount Tax 1 Exempt F|S| |E|X|1| | | | | | 




- 110 - 

➤ ➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

EO3-11070 


Item Correct of positive 

Department or PLU Items 

Void of positive Department 

or PLU items 

Item Correct of others than 

positive Department or PLU 

items. 

All Void of transactions

FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME TABLE (Continued) 

Item 

Code 


85 Foreign Currency 1 C|U|R|1| | | | | | | | 





90 SP. Round for Foreign Currencies C|U|R| |R|N|D| | | | | 

91 Sales Item Count per Customer I|T|E|M|/|C|U|S| | | | 

92 Net Sale per Customer N|S| | |/|C|U|S| | | | 

93 No-sale Counter N|O| |S|A|L|E| | | | | 

94 Validation Counter V|A|L|I| |C|T|R| | | | 

95 Hold Counter H|O|L|D| |C|T|R| | | | 

96 Taxes Consolidated T|A|X| | | | | | | | | 

97 Off-line Authorization O|F|F|L|I|N|E| |A|U|T|H 

In the “Standard Program” columns, the boldface 

characters are double-sized characters 

in actual print and each of them occupies a 

space of two regular-sized characters. 


- 111 - 

EO3-11070 


Used as each foreign 

currency-in-drawer memory 

in Financial Reports. 

They are also used as the 

currency-tendered amount 

on sales receipts. 



• Media-coupon (Item Codes 26 & 40) Credit 1 

• Credit 1 (Item Codes 27 & 41) Credit 2 

• Credit 2 (Item Codes 28 & 42) Debit 

• Credit 3 (Item Codes 29 & 43) EBT Cash 

• Credit 4 (Item Codes 30 & 44) EBT F/S 

Also, the item code 97 “OFFLINE AUTH” is available for V3.0 or after. 

PRINT LINE ITEM NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 10) 

Print line item names not listed in the FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 9) will be 

programmed here. 



* 

10 [X] ➤ |Item Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 



➤ 

........ 


(See NOTE 1) Indicates the end of each item 

name (any unprogrammed 

parts will be filled with blanks.) 


programming items, the 

item code specification 

can be skipped.

- 112 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. The maximum number of characters programmable for each item is in the table on the next page. 

Please note that some items require their name entries as one set. The maximum number of 

characters in the table shows the capacity in regular-sized characters. One double-sized 

character occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. (Also refer to CHARACTER ENTRIES 

at the beginning of this chapter.) 

2. As shown in the table on the next pages, the Standard Program data are preprogrammed (which 

is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the items that need to be changed. 

ex.) To program the amount mark of “$” in Item Code 7: (The amount mark has not been preset as the Standard 

Program data.) 

Meanwhile, other names for two other items in the same Item Code 7 should remain the same as the 

Standard Program data (i.e. “@” for Unit Price and “ITEM” for Sale Item Count). 


Enter 7, depress [ST] (Item Code). 

Enter 400, depress [#]. (@) 

Enter 204, depress [#]. ($) 

Enter 409, depress [#]. (I) 

Enter 504, depress [#]. (T) 

Enter 405, depress [#]. (E) 

Enter 413, depress [#]. (M) 

Depress [ST] to complete character setting for Item Code 7. 

Depress [AT/TL] to complete this submode 

PRINT LINE ITEM NAME TABLE 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P10 

#007 @$ITEM 

Max. Number of Characters 

Item Item Name or Application Standard Program 

Code 

1 Subtotal in transactions S|U|B|T|L| | | | | | | 8 

2 Cash Tendered in transactions C|A|T|E|N|D| | | | | | 8 

3 Sale Total of each transaction T|O|T|A|L| | | | | | | 8 

4 Change due in transactions C|H|A|N|G|E| | | | | | 8 

5 Cash Refunded C|A|S|H| | | | | | | | 8 

6 Negative Department Total -|T|O|T|A|L| | | | | | 8 

7 The following items must be set together. (NOTE 1) @| |I|T|E|M| | | | | | 6 

Unit Price Symbol 1 

Amount Mark ($, etc.) 1 

Sale Item Count Symbol on Receipts 4 

(Continued on the next page) 

0039 

➤

PRINT LINE ITEM NAME TABLE (Continued) 

- 113 - 


EO3-11070 


(Revision Date: Mar. 24, 2004) 


Code 

8 The following items must be set together. (NOTE 2) |#|C|L|T|M| | | | | | 6 

Register No. Symbol 2 

Cashier/Clerk Symbol 2 

Time Symbol 2 

9 Customer Count (on reports) C|U| | | | | | | | | | 2 

10 The following items must be set together. L|B|lb|g| |Kg|$| | | | | 6 

LB Weight (for scale entry, tare weight, and general unit weight) 2 

LB Weight (for PLU Reports) 1 

Gram Weight (for Tare Weight, and General Unit Weight) 2 

Kg Unit Weight (for PLU Reports, and General Unit Weight) 1 

Amount Mark (at scale entry) 1 

11 Previous Balance (Credit) (NOTE 5) P | B | + | | | | | | 8 

12 Previous Balance (Debit) (NOTE 5) P | B | - | | | | | | 8 

13 Transferred Amount in Charge Posting N|E|W| |B|A|L| | | | | | 8 

14 -- vacant -- 

15 The following items must be set together |O|N| | |O|F|F| | | | 8 

ON portion of Training ON/OFF 4 

OFF portion of Training ON/OFF 4 

16 -- vacant -- 

17 Check No. Symbol C|H|E|C|K|No| | | | | | 8 

18 Manual Scale Header on Receipts M|A|N| |W|T| | | | | | 8 

19 Post-issue Receipt Header C|O|P|Y| | | | | | | | 10 

20 PLU Symbol (when no name is programmed for the PLU) P|L|U| | | | | | | | | 3 

21 Taxable Total (by [TXBL TL] key) T|X|B|L| |T|L| | | | | 8 

22 Food Stampable Total (by [FSTL TEND] key) F|S|/|T|L| | | | | | | 8 

23 Food Stamp F|-|S|T|M|P| | | | | | 8 

24 Food Stamp Change F|S| |C|H|G| | | | | | 8 

25 Gallon (Gasoline Entry) G|a|l| | | | | | | | | 3 

26 Hold operation H|O|L|D| | | | | | | | 10 

27 Recall operation R|E|C|A|L|L| | | | | | 10 

28 Sunday, Monday (as part of the date print line) |S|U|N| |M|O|N| | | | 8 

Sunday 4 

Monday 4 

29 Tuesday, Wednesday (as part of the date print line) |T|U|E| |W|E|D| | | | 8 

Tuesday 4 

Wednesday 4 

30 Thursday, Friday (as part of the date print line) |T|H|U| |F|R|I| | | | 8 

Thursday 4 

Friday 4 

31 Saturday (as part of the date print line) |S|A|T| | | | | | | | 4 

32 Training ON/OFF operation, Cashier Report T|R|A|I|N|I|N|G| | | | 10 

(Continued on the next page)

PRINT LINE ITEM NAME TABLE (Continued) 

- 114 - 



Code 

33 Cashier Sign ON S|I|G|N| |O|N| | | | | 10 

34 Cashier Sign OFF S|I|G|N| |O|F|F| | | | 10 

35 Cashier Sign IN S|I|G|N| |I|N| | | | | 10 

36 Cashier Sign OUT S|I|G|N| |O|U|T| | | | 10 

37 Scanning Entry by Coupons U|P|C| |C|P|N| | | | | 12 

38 % Calculation on Additional Item Entries after Subtotal and % Entries G|R|P|.|S|T| | | | | | 8 

39 to 43 -- vacant -- 

44 Store Copy (for Store Receipt); Applicable for V3.0 or after S|T|O|R|E| |C|O|P|Y| | 10 

45 to 62 -- vacant -- 

63 Reservation R|E|S|E|R|V|E|D| | | | 12 

64 Age Confirmation for Sales Item Entry of Cigarette or I|D| |C|H|E|C|K| | | | 12 

Alcoholic Beverage (Applicable for V2.0 or after) | | | | | | | | | | | 

EO3-11070 


➤

OTHER FIXED DATA (unchangeable) 

- 115 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. The name in Standard Program for the Amount Mark in Item Code 7 is set with a blank after a 

RAM Clear. When the specific Amount Mark for the domestic currency is required on sales 

receipts (such as £, F, $), you must program the entire contents of Item Code 7. 

2. The Cashier Symbol to be set in Item Code 8 (“CL” in Standard Program) will be used to print the 

2-digit Cashier ID code on a validation slip. On receipts, the name of each cashier programmed 

in the CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING operation will be printed. 

3. If no programming is performed for an item, the name in the ”Standard Program” column will 

automatically be active. Therefore, program only the items that require changes from the 

standard print data. 

4. On the following page, two tables are placed for other fixed or auto-preset data for printing various 

symbols, items, or descriptors. 

5. When the Check Track option is selected, Item Codes 11 and 12 are used to print when [PICK 

UP BAL] and [CODE OPEN] keys are used respectively. Therefore, both of them should be 

changed into a different name, such as “CUS CODE #”, ”FILE NO.”, etc. (followed by the actual 

Customer File Code No. on receipts). 

OTHER AUTO-PRESET DATA (programmable) 

The following data are automatically preset in program memory. However, when the corresponding items’ names 

are programmed in the corresponding Submodes, the programmed name will be active instead of the preset data. 

Item Preset Data Remarks (Corresponding Submode No.) 

Major Group M G P xx xx = Major Group Code (14) 

Minor Group G P xx xx = Minor Group Code (13) 

Department D P xx xx = Department Code (3) 

Credit Card Company ID CRTxx xx = Credit Company Code (21) 

Cashier Symbol xxCL xx = Cashier ID Code (2) 

Salesperson Symbol S P xx xx = Salesperson Code (20) 

PLU Group PLU GPxx xx = PLU Group Code (29) 

Item Fixed Data Remarks 

RAM Clear RAM-C 

Data Clear DATA-C 

Status Clear STATUS-C 

Program Mode Symbol P Used as header in “SET” or “BLIND” mode print 

System Option Address/# Symbol # 

Percent Rate Symbol % 

Taxable Status Mark T 

Food Stampable Status Mark F 

Negative Amount Mark - 

Quantity Extension Mark x 

Sub-link Dept/PLU Mark ↑ for Dept-to-Dept or PLU-to-PLU link entries 

SI-net Status Mark S (SI = Selective Itemizer 1 and/or 2) 

Misc MISC Report Print for Master-Satellite System

NON-TAXABLE AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING (Submode 12) 

This submode is applied only to the Provinces of Quebec and Ontario, Canada. 


12 [X] ➤ |Non-taxable Limit Amount| 


(1 to 9999¢; or 0 to reset the limit) 

➤ [AT/TL] 

12 [X] ➤ 1 [ST] ➤ |Non-taxable Limit Amount| [#] 

* 


(1 to 9999¢; or 0 to reset the limit) 

➤ 2 [ST] 

** 

➤ |Non-taxable Quantity| [#] 


➤ [AT/TL] 

(1 to 99; 0 to reset the quantity) 

➤ 

NOTES: 1. This program is not applicable in areas where Food 

Stamps are handled in sale entries. 

2. When the sum of the sale portion subject to Tax 1 and the 

sale portion subject to Tax 2 is negative, the portion 

subject to Tax 1 will not be taxed. 

ex.) To set the Non-taxable Limit Amount to $5.00: 

Mode Lock to SET, 12 [X] 

Enter 500, depress [AT/TL]. 

- 116 - 

EO3-11070 


If the programmed data in this submode is carried out: 

Tax 1 will automatically be exempted from the sale total when the sum of the sale portion subject to Tax 

1 and the sale portion subject to Tax 2 is equal to or less than the set limit amount. Meanwhile Tax 2 

to Tax 4 due are always taxed regardless of the Tax 1 exemption. 


• V1.8 or before 

• V1.9 or after 

* When the Non-taxable quantity only is changed 

** When the Non-taxable quantity is programmed immediately after programming the Non-taxable limit amount, 

the key operation “2 [ST]” can be omitted. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P12 

0040 

$5.00

MINOR GROUP NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 13) 

V E & F R 

M E & F I 

O 

T H E R S 

- 117 - 

EO3-11070 


In this operation, the name of each Minor Group is programmed. Which Departments and Minor Groups are linked 

to each Major Group has already been set in the DEPARTMENT PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 3. 



13 [X] ➤ |Minor Group Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(1 to 30) 

* 

(See NOTE 1) 

Repeat for other groups (max. 30 groups) 

* (For sequentially programming 

Group Codes and Names, the 

code specification can be 

skipped.) 

........ ...... 

➤ 

➤ 

NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Minor Group name. One double-sized 

character occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the 

beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Minor Group, an auto-preset data is assigned 

as the Minor Group Name (GPxx; xx = Minor Group Code 01 to 30). 

ex.) To program the following names to the respective Minor Groups: 

Minor Group 1 

Minor Group 2 

Minor Group 8 

Key Operation Mode Lock: SET, enter 13, depress [X]. 

1 [ST] (Minor Group Code) 

[X] 506 [#] 405 [#] [#] 206 [#] [#] [X] 406 [#] 502 [#] [ST] 

(Name: VE & FR) 


[X] 413 [#] 405 [#] [#] 206 [#] [#] [X] 406 [#] 409 [#] [ST] 

(Name: ME & FI) 


[X] 415 [#] 504 [#] 408 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] 503 [#] [ST] 

(Name: OTHERS) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P13 

01VE & FR 

02ME & FI 

08OTHERS 

0042

MAJOR GROUP NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 14) 

ex.) To program the following names to the respective Minor Groups:: 

Major Group 1 




1 [ST] (MGP Code) 

[X] [X] (all double-sized declaration) 

406 [#] 502 [#] 405 [#] 503 [#] 408 [#] [ST] (Name: FRESH) 



413 [#] 504 [#] 408 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] [ST] (Name: MANUF) 



415 [#] 504 [#] 408 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] [ST] (Name: OTHER) 


- 118 - 

EO3-11070 


In this operation, the name of each Major Group is programmed. Which Departments and Minor Groups are linked 

to each Major Group has already been set in the DEPARTMENT PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 3. 



14 [X] ➤ |Minor Group Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(1 to 10) 

* 

(See NOTE 1) 

Repeat for other groups (max. 10 groups) 


Group Codes and Names, the 

code specification can be 

skipped.) 

NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Major Group name. One double-sized 


beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Major Group, an auto-preset data is assigned 

as the Major Group Name (MGPxx; xx = Major Group Code 01 to 10). 

➤ 

FV 

R E S H 

M A N U F 

O T H E R 

➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P14 

01FRESH 

02MANUF 

03OTHER 

0044

CUSTOMER FILE CODE (CHECK TRACK NO.) AND NAME SETTING 

(Submode 15) 

➤ 

Repeat for other codes. 

15 [X] ➤ |Customer File Code| [ST] 

* 

➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Max. 12 digits; 1 to 

999999999999 

Max. 16 characters for 

the Customer’s Name 


codes, the code specification 


➤ 

- 119 - 

➤ 

when no name is to be programmed for the code 

EO3-11070 


This submode creates files for customers whose sales are to be processed using the check track memory. 



NOTES: 1. The Customer File codes that are programmed in this submode will be accessed by entering 

the code and depressing the [PICK UP BAL] key for a sale entry in a charge posting operation 

in the REG or MGR mode. At this time, the balance of the new customer assigned with the 

code will show zero which will be printed as the previous balance line. On finalizing the sale, 

the new balance will be printed at the bottom of the receipt, which will be stored in the same 

Customer File Code memory area. Thus the operator always use the [PICK UP BAL] key for 

both starting a new customer’s account and at recalling the customer’s balance. 

2. If all the programmed Customer File Codes are used up and a new customer file code is 

required to be opened during the business hours, the [CODE OPEN] key may be used. When 

a new code is entered, followed by [CODE OPEN], the code is printed as the previous balance 

line item with the balance zero on the receipt, and at the same time, the code is added to the 

list of the Customer File Codes programmed in the above operation of Submode 15. However, 

the use of the [CODE OPEN] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention, which 

can control the operator’s opening of a new customer file code outside the list of the Customer 

File Codes programmed in Submode 15. 

3. When the Standard Memory is used, a maximum of 1000 Customer File Codes can be 

programmed. When the Expansion Memory is used, a maximum of 3,000 Customer File 

Codes can be programmed. However, the actual maximum number of Customer Files varies 

depending on the RAM allocation. 

Deletion of Individual Customer File Codes 

15 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 

➤ |Customer File Code| [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

Repeat for other codes to be deleted.

Deletion of All Customer File Codes 

15 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 


- 120 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: If the balance of the deleted code is not zero, the Transfer memory of the code will automatically be 

adjusted to zero. At that time, the previous balance to be reset will be printed. 

ex.) To program the following Customer File Codes with Customer Names: 

CODE NAME 

1 JAMES HAILY 



1 [ST] (Customer File Code) 

410 [#] 401 [#] 413 [#] 405 [#] 

503 [#] [#] 408 [#] 401 [#] 

409 [#] 412 [#] 509 [#] [ST] 

(NAME: JAMES HAILY) 

105 HELEN REED 105 [ST] (Customer File Code) 

408 [#] 405 [#] 412 [#] 405 [#] 

414 [#] [#] 502 [#] 405 [#] 

405 [#] 404 [#] [ST] 

[AT/TL] 

ex.) To delete Customer File Code 104 that has once been programmed: 



[ITEM CORR] 104 [ST] (Customer File Code) 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P15 

#000000000001 

JAMES HAILY 

#000000000105 

HELEN REED 

00015 

➤ 

0010 

Number of Customer Files 

opened 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P15 

#000000000104 

JUDY WILSON 

------------------------ 

00014 

➤ 

0014 

Number of Customer Files 

remaining opened

DISPLAY UPPER-ROW MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 17) 

- 121 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode programs the message content to be displayed, when certain items are entered, on the upper row 

of the Operator Display and Customer Display. 



17 [X] ➤ |Item Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 


Max. 16 characters 

* 

Indicates the end of each message 

(the unprogrammed part 

thereafter will be filled with blanks. 


items, the item code No. 

specification can be skipped.) 

➤ 

➤ 

Repeat for other table 

Item Application Standard Program Message 

Code 

1 Scale Entry S|C|A|L|E| | | | | | | | | | | 

2 Signed-OFF or Signed-OUT Condition | | | | | | | | | | | | |L|O|G 

(in REG, MGR, or mode) 

3 Balance due after a short tendered T|O|T|A|L| | | | | | | | | | | 

4 After [C] key depression for an Inquiry R|E|T|R|Y|?| | | | | | | | | | 

Error occurrence (Master-Satellite System) 

5 PLU addition to PLU additional table file P|L|U| |A|D|D| | | | | | | | | 

6 to 13 -- vacant -- 

14 PLU Price Read R|E|A|D| | | | | | | | | | | | 

15 [DISPLAY 1] Depression (Sale Finalization E|B|T| |A|U|T|H| | | | | | | | 

by the EBT Card; for Food Stamp) 

16 [DISPLAY 2] Depression (Sale Finalization D|E|B|I|T| |A|U|T|H| | | | | | 

by the Debit Card) 

17 [DISPLAY 3] Depression (Sale Finalization C|H|E|C|K| |A|U|T|H| | | | | | 

by the Check) 

18 [DISPLAY 4] Depression (Sale Finalization C|R|E|D|I|T| |A|U|T|H| | | | | 

by the Credit Card) 

19 [DISPLAY 5] Depression (Sale Finalization C|A|S|H| |E|B|T| | | | | | | | 

by the Cash EBT Card) 

20 [DISPLAY 6] Depression (For issue of the R|E|C|E|I|P|T| | | | | | | | | 

2nd Receipt; Store Copy) 

21 Age Confirmation for Cigarette or Alcoholic C|H|E|C|K| |I|D| | | | | | | | 

Beverage Entry 

22 [PACK] Depression P|A|C|K| | | | | | | | | | | | 

23 [3rd PRICE] Depression 3|R|D| |P|R|I|C|E| | | | | | | 

24 Card Expiration Date Entry E|N|T|E|R| |E|X|P| |D|A|T|E| | 

* Item Codes 15 to 20 are applicable to V1.9 or after. 

** Item Codes 21 to 23 are applicable to V2.0 or after. 

*** Item Code 24 is applicable to V3.0 or after. 

........

- 122 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed as the message for each Item Code. Only 

regular-sized characters are effective. 

2. As shown in the table above, the Standard Program Message is prepared for each Item Code 

(which is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the message that needs to be 

changed. 

ex.) To program “BALANCE DUE” instead of the Standard 

Program Message “TOTAL” for Item Code 3: 


3 [ST] (Item Code 3) 

402 [#] 401 [#] 412 [#] 401 [#] 414 [#] 403 [#] 

405 [#] [#] 404 [#] 505 [#] 405 [#] (Message: BALANCE DUE) 

[ST] (to complete this item) 


COMBINATION REPORT TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 19) 

In this operation, a maximum of three sets of reports to be issued on the individual terminal may be programmed. 

Thus, in report taking, those reports contained in one set will be outputted in a string by a simple key operation. 



19 [X] ➤ |Table No.| [ST] 

1 to 3 

➤ |Report Code| [#] ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

* 

➤ 

➤ 

...... 

3 to 24 (See the REPORT 

CODE TABLE below), or 

0 to delete the table. 

Repeatable for max. five 

different reports combination. 

Repeat for other tables. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P17 

#003 BALANCE DUE 

0045 


Table, the Table No. specification 

can be skipped.)

Report 

Report Code Table 

Report Name Mode for output 

Code 

X Z GTX GTZ 

3 Financial * * * * 

4 All Individual Cashier * * * * 

5 All Salesperson * * 

6 Credit Card Company Sales (All Indiv. Companies) * * * * 

8 Department Group * * 

9 Each Media Sales and In-drawer Total * 

10 Hourly Range * * 

11 All Department * * * * 

12 All Media Sales and Cash-in-drawer * 

13 All PLU Sales * * * * 

15 All Customer File * 

24 PLU Group * * * * 

- 123 - 

*: output 

Blank: no output 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. In report takings using a Combination Report Table, only those marked with “*” (output) will be 

outputted of all the contained reports in accordance with the mode set at that time. 

Example: When Reports 8 (Department Group), 10 (Hourly Range), and 11 (All Department) 

are programmed in a table: 

Reports outputted in each mode 

X: Department Group, Hourly Range, All Department 

Z: Hourly Range, All Department 

GTX: Department Group, All Department 

GTZ: All Department 

2. For designating each Combination Report Table in report takings in X or Z mode, operate as in 

the table below: 

Combination Report Daily Reports GT Reports 

Table Output (Read or Reset) (Read or Reset) 

Table 1 [AT/TL] 200 [AT/TL] 

Table 2 1 [AT/TL] 201 [AT/TL] 

Table 3 2 [AT/TL] 202 [AT/TL] 

3. When changes are made on report combination in a table, entirely or partially, program all the 

reports in that table again. 

4. An error will result if a Report Code that has already been entered is attempted to enter again in 

the same table. 

5. In Table No.1, auto-preset report combination of Report 11 (All Depts) and Report 3 (Financial) 

is programmed. It will be active as Table No.1 content unless no data are programmed for Table 

No.1.

ex.) To program the following report combinations: 

Table No. Report Code: Report Name 

1 6: Credit Card Company 

8: Dept Group 

9: Each Media Sales and In-drawer 

2 5: All Salesperson 

10: Hourly Range 

11: All Depts 


1 [ST] (Table No.1) 

6 [#] (Credit Card Company) 

8 [#] (Dept Group) 

9 [#] (Each Media Sales and In-drawer) 

[ST] (to complete Table No.1) 

2 [ST] (Table No.2) 

5 [#] (All Salesperson) 

10 [#] (Hourly Range) 

11 [#] (All Depts) 

[ST] (to complete Table No.2) 


- 124 - 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P19 

#1 0608090000 

#2 0510110000 

0046

SALESPERSON CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 20) 

- 125 - 

EO3-11070 


By programming Salesperson Codes here, those codes may be used in sales entries. In addition, the name of 

each salespersons can be programmed in maximum 12 characters. 

Programming 


OPERATION Mode Lock : SET 

20 [X] ➤ |Salesperson Code| [ST] 

1 to 99 

➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

Repeat for other salespersons. 

* 

➤ 

........ 


* For sequentially programming codes, the 

code number specification can be skipped. 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be programmed for a name. 

A combination of both types is also available. 

2. Even if no name is programmed (i.e. skipping the Character Entries before the second [ST] key) 

for a Salesperson Code, that code can be used in sale entries. Then, auto-preset ID symbol “S 

P xx” (xx = Salesperson Code) will be printed instead of a name in this case, for his/her ID in receipt 

print, etc. 

ex.) To program the following salesperson code and names: 

CODE NAME 

1 White 


20 [X]. 

1 [ST] (Salesperson code 1) 

507 [#] (W) 

608 [#] (h) 

609 [#] (i) 

704 [#] (t) 

605 [#] (e) [ST] 

2 Stacy 2 [ST] (Salesperson code 2) 

503 [#] (S) 

704 [#] (t) 

601 [#] (a) 

603 [#] (c) 

709 [#] (y) [ST] 

3 Jansen 3 [ST] (Salesperson code 3) 

410 [#] (J) 

601 [#] (a) 

614 [#] (n) 

703 [#] (s) 

605 [#] (e) 

614 [#] (n) [ST] 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

01 White 

02 Stacy 

03 Jansen 

P20 

0047

Deletion 

CONDITION After Daily Salesperson Reset 


20 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 

➤ |Salesperson Code| [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

- 126 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: When a Salesperson Code is deleted in the above operation, no entries using that code will be accepted 

until the code is again opened in the “Programming” operation already described. 

ex.) To delete Salesperson Code 3 (name: Jansen) that was 

once programmed: 

Mode Lock: SET, 20 [X]. 

[ITEM CORR] 3 [ST] 

[AT/TL] 

Repeat for othr salespersons to be deleted. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P20 

03 Jansen 

------------------------ 

0048

CREDIT CARD COMPANY ID CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING 

(Submode 21) 

21 [X] ➤ |Company ID Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

1 to 12 

assigned by the store 

- 127 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation programs the name of each credit card company. In sales entries, credit cards of maximum 12 

different companies may be used by entering the ID code for the company (1 to 12) and then depressing the 

[CARD No.] key prior to the [Chg] key for finalizing a sale. If no name is programmed for the company ID code, 

the auto-preset name (“CRT01” to “CRT12”) will be printed as the credit card company name on sale receipts and 

reports. 



NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be entered for a company name. A 

combination of both types is also available. (See CHARACTER ENTRIES at the beginning of this 

chapter.) 

ex.) To assign the ID codes and program the names as follows: 

CODE NAME 

1 ABC 


21 [X]. 

1 [ST] 401 [#] (A) 

402 [#] (h) 

403 [#] (C) 

[ST] 

2 LMN 2 [ST] 412 [#] (L) 

413 [#] (M) 

414 [#] (N) 

[ST] 

3 OPQ 3 [ST] 415 [#] (O) 

500 [#] (P) 

501 [#] (Q) 

[ST] 

4 XYZ 4 [ST] 508 [#] (X) 

509 [#] (Y) 

510 [#] (Z) 

[ST] 

[AT/TL] 

* 

➤ 

Repeat for other companies. 

........ 

See NOTE below. 

* (For sequentially 

programming codes, 

the ID code specification 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

01 ABC 

02 LMN 

03 OPQ 

04 XYZ 

P21 

0051

- 128 - 

EO3-11070 


• On V1.9 or after, the names shown on the table below are initially programmed for credit card company names. 

Company Initial Program Remarks 

ID Code 

1 V|I|S|A| | | | | | | | 

2 M|A|S|T|E|R| |C|A|R|D| 

3 A|M|E|X| | | | | | | | 

4 D|I|S|C|O|V|E|R| | | | 

5 D|I|N|E|R|S|S|C|L|U|B| 

6 J|C|B| | | | | | | | | 

7 C|R|T|0|7| | | | | | | 

8 C|R|T|0|8| | | | | | | 

9 C|R|T|0|9| | | | | | | 

10 C|R|T|1|0| | | | | | | 

11 C|R|T|1|1| | | | | | | 

19 A|U|T|H|H|P|R|O|C|E|S|S Used for the EBT feature 

ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 22) 

The message programmed here will be printed on the check as endorsement message by the Remote Slip Printer 

(hardware option) or by the Receipt/Journal Printer with the multi-validation function. The print will be activated 

by depressing the [CHECK No.] key after finalizing the sale. 



24 [X] ➤ |Line No.| [ST] ➤ Character Entries [ST] ➤ |Line Feed Value| [AT/TL] 

1 to 3 

0 to 16 (See NOTES 4, 5.) 

➤ 

➤ 

* 

Repeat for other lines. 

➤ 


lines, the Line No. specification 


NOTES: 1. When all the three lines are programmed with all blanks, no empty line feeding will occur in actual 

printing on the remote slip printer. But when only one line is programmed with any character and 

the other two lines are programmed with all blanks, two empty line feeding will occur. 

On the receipt/journal printer, lines comprised of spaces are not fed. (When one line is 

programmed, the remaining two lines are not fed in actual printing.) 

2. A maximum of 30 characters may be entered for each line. When a double-sized character is 

entered, it occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. 

3. If a double-sized character is entered at the 24th digit in the Character Entries sequence, its 

regular-sized character is printed at the 25th digit (i.e. 1st digit on the next line) in the programming 

receipt (due to Receipt/Journal printer’s capacity in programming operations). 

4. When a value is entered for “Line Feed Value,” printing of data actually starts after feeding the 

number of lines of the entered value. The value may range from 0 to 16 for Remote Slip Printer, 

or from 0 to 11 for Receipt/Journal Printer.

- 129 - 

EO3-11070 


5. The number of the fed lines after RAM clear is programmed to 4 on the remote slip printer and 

the receipt/journal printer. 

-- Refer to the sample operation on the next page -- 

ex.) To program the following endorsement message: 

T E C S T O R E 

Feed Line Value : 3 lines 

1 3 4 3 P E A C H D R I V E 

C A L I F O R N I A 

OPERATION: Mode Lock: SET, 22 [X] 

, T O R R A N C E , 

1 [ST] (Line No.1) [#] (space) 403 [#] (C) 

[X] [X] (all double) 500 [#] (P) 405 [#] (E) 

504 [#] (T) 405 [#] (E) 212 [#] (,) 

405 [#] (E) 401 [#] (A) [ST] (to complete Line 2) 

403 [#] (C) 403 [#] (C) 

[#] (space) 408 [#] (H) (3 [ST]) (Line No.3) 

503 [#] (S) [#] (space) 403 [#] (C) 

504 [#] (T) 404 [#] (D) 401 [#] (A) 

415 [#] (O) 502 [#] (R) 412 [#] (L) 

502 [#] (R) 409 [#] (I) 409 [#] (I) 

405 [#] (E) 506 [#] (V) 406 [#] (F) 

[ST] (to complete Line 1) 405 [#] (E) 415 [#] (O) 

212 [#] (,) 502 [#] (R) 

(2 [ST]) (Line No.2) [#] (space) 414 [#] (N) 

[#] (space) 504 [#] (T) 409 [#] (I) 

[#] (space) 415 [#] (O) 401 [#] (A) 

301 [#] (1) 502 [#] (R) [ST] (to complete Line 3) 

303 [#] (3) 502 [#] (R) 

304 [#] (4) 401 [#] (A) 3 (Feed Line Value) 

303 [#] (3) 414 [#] (N) [AT/TL] to complete this submode. 

Line No.1 

Line No.2 

Line No.3 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P22 

1 


2 

1343PEACHDRIVE,TORR 

ANCE, 

3 

CALIFORNIA 

0053 

03

KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING (Submode 23) 

This submode programs the various selective statuses of media keys and other function keys. 



23 [X] ➤ |Key Code| [ST] ➤ |Bit Nos for SET status| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

1 to 50 (see the table 

on the next page.) 

➤ 

* 

Combination of Bit Nos 1 to 8; 

enter 0 for all bits to RESET status; 

see the table on the next page.) 

Repeat for other key codes. 

- 130 - 


programming key 

codes, the key code 

specification can be 

skipped.) 

EO3-11070 


ex.) To program the following key with the statuses listed below (refer to the KEY STATUS TABLE on the next 

page). 

KEY REQUIRED STATUS 

[CHK TEND] Key Code 3 

Bit 

1: Follow Bit 2 (RESET) 

2: TENDER only (SET) 

3: Validation of Tender Amount (SET) 

4: Short-tendering Allowed (RESET) 

5: Over-tendering Allowed (RESET) 

6: Sale Finalizing after [CHG TIP] Allowed (RESET) 

7: No-purchase Cashing Allowed (SET) 

8: Finalizing R/A Allowed (RESET) 

Key Code 4 

1: Validation Free (RESET) 

2: Endorsement Compulsory (SET) 

Operation 


3 [ST] (key code 3) 

273 [#] (“SET” bit Nos) 

4 [ST] (key code 4) 

2 [#] (“SET” bit Nos) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P23 

#03 237 

0054 

3: Drawer Open/Not-open: not applicable because the key is set as TENDER key 

(RESET or SET) 

4: Negative Check Free (RESET) 

[AT/TL] to complete submode.

From V3.0 or after 

KEY NAME 

[AT/TL] 

[CHK TND] 

(Media 1) 

[Chg] 

(Media 2) 

[MISC] 

(Media 3) 

[CREDIT 1] 

(Media 4) 

[CREDIT 2] 

(Media 5) 

[DEBIT] 

(Media 6) 

[EBT CASH] 

(Media 7) 

[EBT F/S] 

(Media 8) 

[FSTL TEND] 

Before V3.0 

KEY NAME 

[AT/TL] 

[CHK TND] 

(Media 1) 

[Chg] 

(Media 2) 

[MISC] 

(Media 3) 

[CPN] 

(Media 4) 

[CREDIT 1] 

(Media 5) 

[CREDIT 2] 

(Media 6) 

[CREDIT 3] 

(Media 7) 

[CREDIT 4] 

(Media 8) 

[FSTL TEND] 

KEY Bit 

CODE No. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

KEY Bit 

CODE No. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

1 

R R 

KEY STATUS TABLE 

1 RESET: Follow Bit 2 status / SET: TOTAL-only Key 

2 RESET: Follow Bit 1 status / SET: TENDER-only Key 

3 vacant bit 

4 SHORT-TENDERING ... RESET: Allowed / SET: Prohibited 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 

R 

5 OVER-TENDERING ... RESET: Allowed / SET: Prohibited 

6 vacant bit 

7 NO-PURCHASE CASHING ... RESET: Prohibited / SET: Allowed 

8 FINALIZING R/A ITEMS ... RESET: Allowed / SET: Prohibited 

R S S R R S R 

S R R R R R S 

R S S R R R R 

R R S R S R S 

R R S R S R S 

R R S R R R S 

R R S R R R S 

R S S R S R S 

1 

R R 

1 VALIDATION ... RESET: Free / SET: Compulsory 

2 ENDORSEMENT ... RESET: Free / SET: Compulsory (NOTE 5) 

R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R S R 

R R 

3 DRAWER ON THE KEY OPERATION (NOTE 1 below) 

RESET: Open / SET: Not open 

4 vacant bit 

5 NEGATIVE CHECK (NOTE 6) 

RESET: Free / SET: Compulsory 

4 5 

- 131 - 

R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R S R 

R R S R 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 

R 

R S S 

R R S R 

S R R R R R S 

R S S R R R R 

R S S R S R R 

S R R R R R S 

S R R R R R S 

S R R R R R S 

S R R R R R S 

R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R 

4 5 

R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

R R R R 

If Both RESET:allows both 

TOTAL and TENDER 

NOTE 1. Regardless of this bit status selection, 

the drawer opens on Over-tendering, 

and does not open on Short-tendering. 

(This bit status is applied when the key 

is used as TOTAL key.) 

Description of Symbols in the Table: 

R = RESET status Standard Bit status 

S = SET status 

selection auto-preset 

after a RAM Clear 

Those bits marked with either "R" or "S" may 

be SET or RESET according to your 

requirements. 

= Bit not applicable to the key (Those bits 

can be SET or RESET.) 

EO3-11070 


KEY NAME 

[DOLL DISC] 

[VND CPN] 

[STR CPN] 

[BTL RTN] 

[%I] 

[%II] 

[RTN MDSE] 

[ITEM CORR] 

[VOID] 

[R/A] 

[PO] 

[NS] 

[PB-] 

[EX] 

[TRF] 

[ALL VOID] 

[RTR] 

[SI1/TL] 

[SI2/TL] 

KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

KEY 

CODE 

[CUR 1] 46 

[CUR 2] 47 

[CUR 3] 48 

[CUR 4] 49 

[CUR 5] 50 

Bit 

No. 

Bit 

No. 

1 

R R R R R R R 

R R R R R R R 

S S S S S S S 

R R R R R R R 

R R R R R R R 

R R R R R R R 

R R 

R 

R R 

R 

R R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R R R R R* 

R R R R R* 

7 

8 

R R 

R R 

R R 

R R 

R R 

KEY STATUS TABLE (Continued) 

1 VALIDATION 


2 MGR INTERVENTION (in REG mode) 


3 

2 3 4 5 6 7 

TAX 1 STATUS (NOTE 2) 

RESET: Non-taxable / SET: Taxable 

4 TAX 2 STATUS (NOTE 2) 


5 TAX 3 STATUS (NOTE 2) 


6 

TAX 4 STATUS (NOTE 2) 


7 FOOD STAMP (or GST) Status (NOTE 2) 

RESET: Non-stampable (or GST Non-taxable) 

SET: Food Stampable (or GST taxable) 

7 Special Rounding for Foreign Currency 

RESET: Not applicable. SET: Applicable (1 digit) (NOTE 3) 

8 Special Rounding for Foreign Currency 

RESET: Follow Bit 7. SET: Applicable (2 digits) (NOTE 3) 

- 132 - 

NOTE 2. If RESET status is selected for the 

[STR CPN] key, the key will always be 

Non-taxable or Non Food Stampable 

regardless of the Department tax status. 

As for the [SI1/TL] and [SI2/TL] keys, the 

addition or the subtraction is performed 

corresponding to the special charge/special 

discount option for the respective keys. 








requirements. 

= Bit not applicable to the key (Those bits 

can be SET or RESET.) 


R 

S 

The status selections for [PB-] key is 

effective for [CODE OPEN] when the Check 

Track Memory option is selected. 

NOTE 4: See the next page. 

* This status selection is available only when the 

* food stamp feature has been selected. Do not 

* set this bit when the GST feature is selected. 

= RESET status Standard Bit status 

= SET status 



EO3-11070 


NOTE 3. To apply the 2-digit Special Rounding process for 

Foreign Currency, select SET status for both Bit 7 

and Bit 8.

KEY STATUS TABLE (Continued) 

C 

A 

S 

E 

KEY STATUS SELECTION 

Media’s New Balance’s 

Validation Validation 

Status Status ([TRF]) 

RESULTING 

VALIDATION 

STATUS 

RESULTING 

VALIDATION 

PRINT 

CONTENT 

1 FREE FREE FREE New Balance 

2 COMPULSORY FREE COMPULSORY Sale Total or Media* 

3 FREE COMPULSORY COMPULSORY New Balance 

4 COMPULSORY COMPULSORY COMPULSORY New Balance 

- 133 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE 4: The following shows the Validation Compulsory status combination and the Validation Print content in case of finalizing a sale 

with a previous balance. 

* To be determined by the Media Key’s status selected at Bit 3 (VALIDATION PRINT AMOUNT 

AFTER TENDERING) of the first Key Code, on the page before previous page. (The item name is 

the media’s but the amount is Sale Total -- R/A Total in this case -- or the Media Tender Amount 

depending on the Bit status selection.) 

OPERATION SAMPLE 

250 [PB+] 

PRINT FORM SAMPLE 

Journal or Receipt 

80 [DEPT 1] 

PB+ 2.50 

[Chg] 

150 [R/A] 

DPO1 0.80 

Chg 3.30 

R/A 1.50 

200 [CHK] 

CHECK 2.00 

CHANGE 0.50 

[VALIDATE] 

N-BAL 1.80 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

CASE 1, 3, or 4: 

CASE 2 

(with Bit 3 RESET: prints Sale 

Total (R/A) amount) 

CASE 2 

(with Bit 3 RESET: prints Media 

Tender amount) 

Validation Slip 

N-BAL 1.80 

CHECK 1.50 

CHECK 2.00 

NOTE 5: When paper is set to both Receipt/Journal Printer and Remote Slip Printer at a time, printing will occur on the printer designated 

by Address 6, Bit 5 of the system option. 

NOTE 6: When the negative check compulsory status is selected, the credit card No. check operation is necessary before finalizing a sale.

LINK-PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 25) 

- 134 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode programs Link-PLU Tables and their respective Sub-link PLUs. When a PLU is programmed with 

a Link-PLU Table No. (Address 10 of the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation), an entry of the PLU will 

automatically enter the Sub-link PLU that is programmed in the Link-PLU Table No. Refer to the “Link-PLU Table 

No.” description in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING, Submode 4, as to details of PLU-to-PLU linkage. 

Programming 



25 [X] ➤ |Link-PLU Table No.| [ST] ➤ |Sub-link PLU Code| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

1 to 99 (Enter the No. 

pro-grammed in the 

Head-link PLU item in 

Submode 4.) 


ex.) To set the following Link-PLU Table and its Sub-link PLU: 

Link-PLU Table No. Sub-link PLU Code 

1 101301 


1 [ST] 101301 [PLU] [AT/TL] 

* 

➤ 


6 or 13 digits (Enter the code 

of the PLU to be auto-entered 

when the Head-link PLU is 

entered in a sale.) 


tables, the Table No. specification 


➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P25 

#01 101301 

NOTE: In this example, Link-PLU Table No. has already been set in PLU 90601 (Coke Small-B) and PLU 90701 

(7-up Small-B) as Head-link items in the PLU PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4. The Sub-link 

PLU 101301 here has been programmed as a bottle-deposit PLU (Small-Btl Depo) in the same 

submode. 

0055

Deletion of Link-PLU Tables 



25 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 

➤ |Link-PLU Table No.| [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

TARE TABLE AND GENERAL UNIT WEIGHT SETTING (Submode 26) 

➤ |General Unit Weight Code| ➤ [AT/TL] 

- 135 - 

EO3-11070 


In the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be set with 

a Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit Weight is set here 

so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments or PLUs without any Individual 

Unit Weight designation. 



Repeat for othr tables to be deleted. 

26 [X] ➤ |Tare Table No.| [ST] ➤ |Tare Weight| [#] 

Only to set the 

General Unit 

Weight 

➤ 

1 to 9 


➤ 

* 

➤ 

1 to 11 

0 to 999 

(Unit: 1/100 LB or gram. 

Example: enter 13 for 0.13 LB.) 

*(For sequentially programming 

tables, the Table No. specification 


LB unit Kg unit 

1: 1 LB 1 Kg 

........ 

........ 

........ 

9: 9 LB 9 Kg 

10: 1/2 LB 100 g 

11: 1/4 LB Not applicable 

NOTE: The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1LB or 1Kg). 

** 

➤ 

** Only to set the Tare Weight

ex.) To set the following: 

Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 0.13 LB, 

General Weight 2 LB (Code 2). 


1 [ST] 13 [#] 2 [AT/TL] 

PLU PRESET-CODE KEY SETTING (Submode 27) 

- 136 - 

EO3-11070 


When there are any keys programmed as PLU Preset-code Keys (SFKC 96) on the ECR Keyboard (Ordinary or 

Flat Type), and/or when the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected to the ECR, a PLU code may 

be preset to each of those keys in this operation. 



➤ 


Repeat for other keys. 

27 [X] ➤ |PLU Code| ➤ [KEY] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Enter through 

Depress the required key 

Numeric Keys on 

on the ECR Keyboard or 

the ECR Keyboard 

(Enter 0 to close the 

key); Max. 6 digits 

on the PK-2 Keyboard. 

➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P26 

#1 0.13LB 

2LB 

NOTES: 1. If the PLU Code entry is skipped and a [KEY] is simply depressed in the above sequence, the 

preprogrammed PLU Code of the KEY will be displayed. 

2. A non-opened PLU Code (i.e. PLU non-existent in the PLU table file) can be set on a KEY; 

however, pressing the KEY in sale entries will result in an error unless the code is opened in the 

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4. 

3. If “0” is entered as PLU Code in the above sequence, the KEY will be closed. Pressing the closed 

KEY in sale entry will cause an error. 

0037

ex.) To set following PLU Codes to KEYs (of SFKC 96) on the ECR keyboard: 

PLU Code 27 [X] 


50321 50321 [required key] 

50322 50322 [required key] 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

[AT/TL] 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

PK-2 KEYBOARD 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

- 137 - 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

100 

➤ 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P27 

#073 050321 

#074 050322 

0017 

Location Code (left side); refer to RE- 

MARKS 1 and 2 on the next page. 

PLU Code assigned to the key (right side) 

REMARKS: 1. The Nos 1 through 130 marked on the PK-2 Keyboard are the KEY Nos to be printed on the left 

side of the program receipt issued in the operation on the preceding page. If each KEY is not set 

with a PLU Code, the auto-preset PLU Code identical to the initial KEY No. in the above figure 

will be active as its preset PLU Code 

ex.) KEY No.1 ... PLU Code 1 

KEY No.130... PLU Code 130 

2. When a PLU code is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key on the ECR Keyboard in the operation 

on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the absolute location of the key 

will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code. 

The Hardware Key Codes of the ECR keyboards of Ordinary Type and Flat Type are shown on 

the next page. 

101 

102 

103 

104 

105 

106 

107 

108 

109 

110 

111 

112 

113 

114 

115 

116 

117 

118 

119 

120 

121 

122 

123 

124 

125 

126 

127 

128 

129 

130

- 138 - 

EO3-11070 


ECR Ordinary Type Keyboard 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

90 

ECR Flat Type Keyboard (V1.8 or before) 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

101 

102 

104 

105 

106 

107 

108 

109 

110 

111 

113 

114 

115 

116 

117 

118 

119 

120 

121 

122 

123 

124 

125 

126 

129 

130 

131 

132 

133 

134 

135 

136 

137 

138 

139 

140 

141 

127 

128 

142 

143 

144 

145 

100 

112 

103

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

ECR Flat Type Keyboard (V1.9 or after) 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

- 139 - 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

104 110 117 124 129 136 139 

146 105 111 118 125 130 137 140 

100 148 112 119 126 131 138 141 

101 106 113 120 149 132 151 142 

102 107 114 121 127 133 152 143 

147 108 115 122 150 134 153 144 

103 109 116 123 128 135 154 145 

REPORT ITEM PRINT/NON-PRINT SETTING (Submode 28) 

This submode programs the items to be printed out on reports. 



➤ 

28 [X] ➤ |Item Code| [ST] ➤ |Print/Non-print Selection| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(See the table on 

the next page.) 

➤ 


* 

0: Print 

1: Non-print 

* For sequentially programming 

items, the item code specification 


EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. Print/Non-print status programmed here prevails the open/close status set in the SFKC 

programming operation. 

2. The name of each item on reports are to be programmed in FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME 

PROGRAMMING (Submode 9). 

3. After a RAM Clear, all items are set to print as initial setting.

ex.) To set the following item to be non-printed on reports 

(presumed that all the items have been set to print): 

Tax 3 (Item Code 10) 

Tax 4 (Item Code 11) 


10 [ST] 1 [#] 

11 [ST] 1 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

REPORT ITEM NAME TABLE 

Item Total/Counter Name Standard Program 

Code 

1 Grand Total G | T | | | | | | | | 

2 NET GT N|E|T| |G|T| | | | | | 

3 Gross Sale G | S | | | | | | | | 

4 % + (% I) %|+| | | | | 

5 % + (% II) %|+| |II| | | 

6 Net Sale Without Tax N | S | | | | | | | | 

7 GST G|S|T| | | | | | | | | 

8 Tax 1 T|A|X|1| | | | | | | | 

9 Tax 2 T|A|X|2| | | | | | | | 

10 Tax 3 T|A|X|3| | | | | | | | 

11 Tax 4 T|A|X|4| | | | | | | | 

12 Manual Tax (Tax 5) T|A|X|5| | | | | | | | 

13 Net Sale With Tax N | S | | | | | | | | 

14 Positive Other Income Depts. H|A|S|H| |D|P| | | | | 

15 Negative Other Income Depts. -|H|A|S|H| |D|P| | | | 

16 % - on Subtotal (% I) %|-| | | | | 

17 % - on Subtotal (% II) %|-| | | | | 

18 Vendor Coupon V|.|C|P|N| | | | | | | 

19 Dollar Discount D|I|S|C| | | | | | | | 

20 Bottle Return B|T|R| | | | 

21 All Media Sales T|O|T|A|L| | | | | | | 

22 Cash Sales (AT/TL) C|A|S|H| | | | | | | | 

23 Media 1 Sales (CHK) C|H|E|C|K| | | | | | | 

24 Media 2 Sales (Chg) C|h|g| | | | | | | | | 

25 Media 3 Sales (MISC) M|I|S|C| | | | | | | | 



28 Media 6 Sales (Debit) D|E|B|I|T| | | | | | | 

- 140 - 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

P28 

#010 1 

#011 1 

0060

REPORT ITEM NAME TABLE (Continued) 

Item 

Code 


29 Media 7 Sales (EBT Cash) E|B|T| |C|A|S|H| | | | 

30 Media 8 Sales (EBT F/S) E|B|T| |F|/|S| | | | | 

31 Food Stamp Sales F|S| |T|L| | | | | | | 

32 Received-on-Account R|/|A| | | | 

33 Paid-Out P|O| | | | | 

34 Loan L|O|A|N| | | 

35 Pick Up P|I|C|K|U|P| 

36 Cash-in-drawer C|A|S|H| |I|D| | | | | 

37 Media 1-in-drawer (CHK) C|H|E|C|K| |I|D| | | | 

38 Media 2-in-drawer (Chg) C|h|g| |I|D| | | | | | 

39 Media 3-in-drawer (MISC) M|I|S|C| |I|D| | | | | 



42 Media 6-in-drawer (Debit) D|E|B|I|T| |I|D| | | | 

43 Media 7-in-drawer (EBT Cash) E|B|T| |C|A|S|H| |I|D| 

44 Media 8-in-drawer (EBT F/S) E|B|T| |F|/|S| |I|D| | 

45 Food Stamp-in-drawer F|S|I|D| | | | | | | | 

46 Food Stamp CHANGE F|S| |C|G| | | | | | | 

47 Item Correct C|O|R|R| | | 

48 Void V|O|I|D| | | 

49 Misc. Void M|I|S|C| |V|D| | | | | 

50 All Void A|L|L| |V|D| 

51 % - on Line Items (%I) %|-| | | | | | | | | | 

52 % - on Line Items (%II) %|-| | | | | | | | | | 

53 Dollar Discount on Line Items D|I|S|C| | | | | | | | 

54 Store Coupon S|.|C|P|N| | 

55 Negative Depts. Total -|D|P| |T|L| | | | | | 

56 Returned Merchandise R|T|N| | | | 

57 Negative Tax -|T|A|X| | | | | | | | 

58 Negative Sales Total -|S|A|L|E| | | | | | | 

59 Negative Mode Total R|E|G|-| | | | | | | | 

60 Transfer Balance GT T|R|F| |T|L| | | | | | 

61 Transfer + GT T|R|F|+| |G|T| | | | | 

62 Transfer - GT T|R|F|-| |G|T| | | | | 

63 Transfer + Daily T|R|F|+| | | | | | | | 

64 Transfer - Daily T|R|F|-| | | | | | | | 

65 PB (Previous Balance) Sales P|B| |T|L| | | | | | | 

66 PB R/A (PB Paid) P|B| |R|/|A| | | | | | 

67 PB PO (PB Refunded) P|B| |P|O| | | | | | | 

68 GST Taxable Total G|S|T| |T|X|B|L| | | | 




- 141 - 

➤ 

➤ ➤ 

➤ 

EO3-11070 


Item Correct of positive 

Department or PLU Items 

Void of positive Department 

or PLU items 

Item Correct of others than 

positive Department or PLU 

items. 

All Void of transactions

REPORT ITEM NAME TABLE (Continued) 

Item 

Code 





75 Tax-exempt Customer T|A|X| |E|X| | | | | | 

76 GST Exempted Sales G|S|T| |E|X| | | | | | 














90 SP. Round for Foreign Currencies C|U|R| |R|N|D| | | | | 

91 Sales Item Count per Customer I|T|E|M|/|C|U|S| | | | 

92 Net Sale per Customer N|S| | |/|C|U|S| | | | 

93 No-sale Counter N|O| |S|A|L|E| | | | | 

94 Validation Counter V|A|L|I| |C|T|R| | | | 

95 Hold Counter H|O|L|D| |C|T|R| | | | 

97 Off-line Authorization O|F|F|L|I|N|E| |A|U|T|H 

In the “Standard Program” columns, the 

bold-face characters are double-sized 

characters in actual print and each of 

them occupies a space of two regularsized 

characters. 

- 142 - 

EO3-11070 


Used as each foreign 

currency-in-drawer memory in 

Financial Reports. 

They are also used as the 

currency-tendered amount on 

sales receipts. 



• Media-coupon (Item Codes 26 & 40) Credit 1 

• Credit 1 (Item Codes 27 & 41) Credit 2 

• Credit 2 (Item Codes 28 & 42) Debit 

• Credit 3 (Item Codes 29 & 43) EBT Cash 

• Credit 4 (Item Codes 30 & 44) EBT F/S 

Also, the item code 97 “OFFLINE AUTH” is available for V3.0 or after.

PLU GROUP NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 29) 

29 [X] ➤ |PLU Group Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(1 to 99) 

(See NOTE) 

➤ 

Repeat for other groups 

(max. 99 groups) 

G R O C E R Y P L U G P 1 

G R O C E R Y P L U G P 2 

* 

➤ 

* (For sequentially programming Group Codes 

and Names, the code number specification 


- 143 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode programs the name of each PLU Group. Which PLUs are linked to which PLU Groups has already 

been set in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4. 



NOTE: A maximum of 16 regular-sized characters may be set for each PLU Group name. One double-sized 


beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a PLU Group, an auto-preset data is assigned 

as the PLU Group Name (PLU GPxx; xx = PLU Group Code 01 to 99). 

ex.) To program the following names to the respective PLU Groups: 

PLU Group 1 

PLU Group 2 


1 [ST] (PLU Group Code) 

407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 403 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] 509 [#] [#] 

500 [#] 412 [#] 505 [#] [#] 407 [#] 500 [#] [#] 301 [#] 

[ST] (Name: GROCERY PLU GP 1) 

2 [ST] (PLU Group Code) 

407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 403 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] 509[#] [#] 

500 [#] 412 [#] 505 [#] [#] 407 [#] 500 [#] [#] 302 [#] 

[ST] (Name: GROCERY PLU GP 2) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P29 

01 GROCERY PLU GP 1 

02 GROCERY PLU GP 2 

0061

COMMENT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 30) 

Applicable on V1.9 or after 

This submode programs various 10 comment messages. 



30 [X] ➤ |Message Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(1 to 10) 

(Max. 24 characters for 

each message) 

* 

➤ 

Repeat for another comment message (max. 10 messages) 

* (For sequentially programming Message Codes and Messages, the code 


The messages shown on the table below are initially programmed for comment messages. 

➤ 

- 144 - 

EO3-11070 


Message Initial Program Remarks 

Code 

1 X| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | : Character Code 155 


3 A|U|T|H|O|R|I|Z|A|T|I|O|N| |N|O|.| | | | | | | 

4 D|E|C|L|I|N|E|D| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 

5 C|A|N|C|E|L|L|E|D| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 

6 A|P|P|R|O|V|E|D| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 

7 R|E|F|E|R|E|N|C|E| |N|O|.| | | | | | | | | | | 

8 E|B|T| |B|A|L|A|N|C|E|S| | | | | | | | | | | | 

9 I|N|T|E|R|F|A|C|E| |F|A|I|L| | | | | | | | | | 

10 S |T |O|R |E | |C|O|P |Y | | | | |

DISPLAY MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 31) 

31 [X] ➤ |Message Line No.| [ST] ➤ Character Entries [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

(1 to 4; max. 4 lines) 

(Max. 16 characters per 

* 

line. Regular-size only.) 

➤ 

Repeat for other lines. 

➤ 

* Allowed for sequential Line No. only 

- 145 - 

EO3-11070 


The “DISPLAY MESSAGE” here means the message to be displayed in the 16-digit dot windows of the Operator 

Display panel (and Customer Display panel if the 16-digit dot windows are installed as hardware option) while the 

Mode Lock of the terminal is in the “LOCK” position. This display message may be used as information, 

commercial message, welcoming greeting, etc. 



NOTES: 1. When the option “Store Message SCROLLING DISPLAY” is selected, four lines (Line Nos 1 to 

4) are available. Even when the option “Store Message 16 CHARACTERS HELD” is selected, 

four lines (Line Nos. 1 to 4) are available. In this case, refer to the “Store Message Display” 

operation to display the respective message lines. 

2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can be 

entered consecutively after designating Line No.1 at first and depressing [ST] for each line end. 

3. The character must be regular-sized only. 

4. The DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the REG or MGR mode if so designated 

by system option. 

ex.) To program the following display message under the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option: 

T H I S C O U N T E R I S 

C L O S E D . P L E A S E 

G O T O A N O T H E R , T 

H A N K Y O U . . . 

Line No. 1 

Line No.2 

Line No.3 

Line No.4

OPERATION: Mode Lock; SET; enter 31, depress [X]. 

1 [ST] (Line No.1) (3 [ST]) (Line No.3) 

504 [#] (T) 407 [#] (G) 

408 [#] (H) 415 [#] (O) 

409 [#] (I) [#] (space) 

503 [#] (S) 504 [#] (T) 

[#] (space) 415 [#] (O) 

403 [#] (C) [#] (space) 

415 [#] (O) 401 [#] (A) 

505 [#] (U) 414 [#] (N) 

414 [#] (N) 415 [#] (O) 

504 [#] (T) 504 [#] (T) 

405 [#] (E) 408 [#] (H) 

502 [#] (R) 405 [#] (E) 

[#] (space) 502 [#] (R) 

409 [#] (I) 212 [#] (,) 

503 [#] (S) [#] (space) 

[#] (space) 504 [#] (T) 

[ST] (to complete Line 1) [ST] (to complete Line 3) 

(2 [ST]) (Line No. 2) (4 [ST]) (Line No. 4) 

403 [#] (C) 408 [#] (H) 

412 [#] (L) 401 [#] (A) 

415 [#] (O) 414 [#] (N) 

503 [#] (S) 411 [#] (K) 

405 [#] (E) [#] (space) 

404 [#] (D) 509 [#] (Y) 

214 [#] (.) 415 [#] (O) 

[#] (space) 505 [#] (U) 

[#] (space) 214 [#] (.) 

500 [#] (P) 214 [#] (.) 

412 [#] (L) 214 [#] (.) 

405 [#] (E) 

401 [#] (A) [ST] (to complete Line 4) 

503 [#] (S) 

405 [#] (E) [AT/TL] (to complete this submode) 

[#] (space) 


- 146 - 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P31 

1 

THIS COUNTER IS 

2 

CLOSED. PLEASE 

3 

GO TO ANOTHER,T 

4 

HANK YOU... 

0062

ERROR MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 32) 

- 147 - 

EO3-11070 


The messages to be set programmed here will be displayed when errors occur. Each error will be indicated with 

an error tone, and the Error Message (to be set here) is displayed in maximum 16 characters. 



➤ 

Repeat for another error code. 

➤ 

32 [X] ➤ |Error Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 


next page.) 

* 


messages, the error code 


........ 

Indicates the end of each error 

message (any unprogrammed 

parts will be filled with blanks). 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each error message. Enter all the 

characters in regular size. 

2. As shown in the table on the next page, the Standard Program data are prepared (which is autoset 

after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the error messages that need to be changed. 

ex.) To change the following items: 

ERROR CODE STANDARD DATA CHANGE 

17 MASTER IS BUSY MASTER BUSY 

Mode Lock to SET, 32 [X] 

17 [ST] (Error Code) 

413 [#] (M) 

401 [#] (A) 

503 [#] (S) 

504 [#] (T) 

405 [#] (E) 

502 [#] (R) 

[#] (space) 

402 [#] (B) 

505 [#] (U) 

503 [#] (S) 

509 [#] (Y) 

[ST] (to complete Code 17) [AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P32 

17 MASTER BUSY 

0063

ERROR CODE AND MESSAGE TABLE 

Error Content or Cause of Error Standard Program Message 

Code 

1 Operation or Key Sequence error O|P|E|R|A|T|I|O|N| |E|R|R|O|R| 

2 Manager Intervention required M|A|N|A|G|E|R| |R|E|Q|U|I|R|E|D 

3 Validation required V|A|L|I|D|A|T|I|O|N| |C|M|P| | 

4 Drawer-close Compulsory error C|L|O|S|E| |D|R|A|W|E|R| | | | 

5 Code Entry Compulsory error C|O|M|P|U|L|S|O|R|Y| |C|O|D|E| 

6 Sub-link Department Entry required C|O|M|P| |D|E|P|O|S|I|T| | | | 

7 Scale Entry Compulsory error S|C|A|L|E| |R|E|Q|U|I|R|E|D| | 

8 The scale is malfunctioning. S|C|A|L|E| |O|U|T| | | | | | | 

9 Other miscellaneous errors M|I|S|C| |E|R|R|O|R| | | | | | 

10 File Receive error (with PC Feature) P|C| |C|O|M|M| |E|R|R|O|R| | | 

11 Undefined Code or Code Duplicated error C|O|D|E| |E|R|R|O|R| | | | | | 

12 Programming error P|R|O|G|R|A|M| |E|R|R|O|R| | | 

13 The inquired file is in use by others (in M-S System) O|C|C|U|P|Y| | | | | | | | | | 

14 Connection error (in M-S System) I|R|C| |C|O|N|N|E|C|T| |E|R|R| 

15 The card is not acceptable as a result of Nagative Card check. C|A|L|L| |M|A|N|A|G|E|R| | | | 

16 Limit Over warning (in Media Pick Up) D|R|A|W|E|R| |L|I|M|I|T| | | | 

17 Master Terminal is busy. (in M-S System) M|A|S|T|E|R| |I|S| |B|U|S|Y| | 

18 Backup Error (in M-S System) P|L|E|A|S|E| |B|A|C|K| |U|P| | 

19 Satellite Transaction Buffer is full. (in M-S system) T|R|A|N|S| |B|U|F|F| |F|U|L|L| 

20 Link PLU programming error L|I|N|K| |P|L|U| |E|R|R|O|R| | 

21 Validation operation error V|A|L|I|D|A|T|I|O|N| |E|R|R|O|R 

22 Endorsement print compulsory error C|O|M|P|U|L|S|O|R|Y| |S|L|I|P| 

23 Check digit value error C|D|V| |E|R|R|O|R| | | | | | | 

24 Negative check compulsory error C|O|M|P| |C|H|E|C|K| |N|O|.| | 

25 Data in communication buffer is being consolidated X|/|Z| |I|N| |P|R|O|G|R|E|S|S| 

26 Rewriting the reset data in communication buffer is prohibited. A|L|R|E|A|D|Y| |R|E|S|E|R|V|E|D 

27 Underage person has attempted to buy U|N|D|E|R| |A|G|E| | | | | | | 

cigarette or alcoholic beverage. 

28 Quantity entry compulsion error (when this C|O|M|P| |Q|U|A|N|T|I|T|Y| | | 

compulsion status is programmed to a PLU item) 

41 The EFT terminal is not connected E|F|T| |C|O|N|N|E|C|T| |E|R|R| 

43 Time-out condition on the EFT terminal E|F|T| |T|I|M|E| |O|U|T| | | | 

44 Entry of new sale transaction is attempted R|E|C|E|I|P|T| |R|E|Q|U|I|R|E|D 

before issuing the store receipt 

45 Communication error between the ECR E|F|T| |C|O|M| |E|R|R|O|R| | | 

and the EFT terminal 

* Error codes 27 and 28 are applicable to V2.0 or after. 

** Error codes 41, 43 to 45 are applicable to V3.0 or after. 

NOTE: M-S system = Master-Satellite System 

- 148 - 

EO3-11070 


MEDIA PICK-UP WARNING SETTING (Submode 33) 

MEDIA CODE AND KEY TABLE 

- 149 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode sets the limit of the amount-in-drawer of each media key. When a transaction is finalized and each 

media-in-drawer amount exceeds the limit value set here, the message “DRAWER LIMIT” (programmable in 

Submode 32) is displayed with an error tone generated (NOTE). 



33 [X] ➤ |Media Code| [ST] ➤ |Limit Amount| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

1 to 10 


* 

➤ 

Repeat for other Media Codes. 

Key Code Key 

1 [AT/TL] 

2 [CHK TEND] 

3 [Chg] 

4 [MISC] 

5 [CPN] 

6 [CREDIT 1] 

7 [CREDIT 2] 

8 [CREDIT 3] 

9 [CREDIT 4] 

10 [FSTL TEND] 


(1 to 99999999; result: $0.01 

to $999,999.99) Enter 0 to 

reset the limit. 

* (Repeatable from here for 

sequentially programming 

Media Codes.) 

NOTE: The error status can be indicated by both Error Tone and Message or by Message only, by a system 

option selection. (The Error Tone lasts for 2 seconds.) 

ex.) To set the following preset amounts on the keys below: 

Key Key Code Limit Amount 

[AT/TL] 1 $9,999.99 

[CHK TEND] 2 $999.99 

Key Operation 

Mode Lock: SET, 33[X] 

1 [ST] 999999 [#] 

2 [ST] 99999 [#] 

[AT/TL] to complete this submode 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P33 

CASH ID $9999.99 

CHECK ID $999.99 

0064

FUNCTION KEY (COMBINATION KEY) SETTING (Submode 34) 

NOTES: 1. To delete a string of keys once set on a FUNCTION key, operate: 

34 [X] ➤ [FUNCTION] ➤ 

Same key 

[FUNCTION] ➤ [AT/TL] 

- 150 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode programs a string of keys on each FUNCTION key ([FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 10]). Using 

such programmed [FUNCTION] keys, the operator can eliminate time in various routine operation procedures. 



34 [X] ➤ [FUNCTION] ➤ [KEY] .......... [KEY] ➤ [FUNCTION] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Depress one of the Depress the keys to be Depress the same 

FUNCTION keys 

contained in the key 

FUNCTION key that 

(FUNCTION 1 to 

string. 

was pressed at the 

FUNCTION 10). 

declaration. 

➤ 

2. Neither [RF] nor [JF] keys can be set in a string of keys in the setting operation above. 

3. None of [FUNCTION] keys themselves can be contained in a string of keys for any [FUNCTION] 

key. 

4. No keys on the PK-2 keyboard can be contained in a key string. 

ex.) To set the following key operation as [FUNCTION 1] key: 

100 [DEPT 1] [ST] [AT/TL] 


34 [X] [FUNCTION 1] 

[1] [00] [DEPT 1] [ST] [AT/TL] 

[FUNCTION 1] [AT/TL] 

To set the following key operation as [FUNCTION 2] 

key: 5000 [AT/TL] 


34 [X] [FUNCTION 2] 

[5] [00] [AT/TL] 

[FUNCTION 2] [AT/TL] 

➤ 

➤ 

Repeat for other FUNCTION keys. 

Repeatable for other FUNCTION keys whose string of keys are to be deleted. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 



PHONE: 87-6437 



0008 

11-14-1994 MON #1 

P34 

P34 

#01 023 

#02 028 

030 

066 

0009 

030 

043 

048 

066

NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY LIMIT AMOUNT SETTING (Submode 35) 

- 151 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode sets the limit amount to be entered through each of the negative-amount keys [VND CPN] ,[STR 

CPN] ,[BTL RTN] , and [DOLL DISC]. 



35 [X] ➤ |Key Code| [ST] ➤ |Limit Amount| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

1 to 4 


➤ 

Repeat for other Media Codes. 


(1 to 999999; result: $0.01 

to $9,999.99) Enter 0 to 

reset the limit. 

KEY CODE AND KEY TABLE 

Key Code Key 

1 [VND CPN] 

2 [STR CPN] 

3 [BTL RTN] 

4 [DOLL DISC] 

* (Repeatable from here for 

sequentially programming 

Key Codes.) 

NOTES: 1. The [VND CPN] key will not be restricted by the limit amount set here but the amount up to 7 digits 

will be entered in MGR or - mode. 

2. The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transaction entries. 

ex.) To set High Limit Amounts for the respective keys below: 

Key Key Code High Limit Mode Lock: SET 35 [X] 

[VND CPN] 1 $10.00 1 [ST] 1000 [#] 

[STR CPN] 2 $20.00 (2 [ST]) 2000 [#] 

[BTL RTN] 3 $1.20 (3 [ST]) 120 [#] 

[DOLL DISC] 4 $1.00 (4 [ST]) 100 [#] 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P35 

V.CPN $10.00 

S.CPN $20.00 

BTR $1.20 

DISC $1.00 

0066

DRAWER WARNING TIME SETTING (Submode 38) 

38 [X] ➤ |Time to Drawer Warning Buzzer Start| 

Max. 2 digits ; 1 to 99 (seconds) 

➤ [AT/TL] 

- 152 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode sets the number of seconds as the period of time for the cash drawer remaining open until the 

alarm buzzer is generated to warn operator to close the drawer. 



NOTES: 1. The value of 0 second cannot be set. (To cancel the drawer warning function, reset the 

Warning option itself.) 

2. After a RAM Clear, the value of 15 seconds is set as the initial setting. 

3. The setting here is effective only when the following are both selected in System Option 

Programming: 

Address 27 - Bit 1 SET: Drawer-close Compulsory 

Address 27 - Bit 2 SET: Drawer Warning Alarm ACTIVE 

ex.) To set 20 seconds for the Drawing Warning time: 

Key Operation 


20 [AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P38 

0067 

20

READ/RESET REPORT NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 39) 

This submode programs the report names to be printed at the top of each READ/RESET reports. 



39 [X] ➤ |Report No.| [ST] ➤ Character Entries ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

1 to 70 



Repeat for other FUNCTION keys. 

* 

➤ 


(See NOTE 1.) 

Indicates the end of each item 

name (the unprogrammed part 

thereafter will be filled with blanks). 

- 153 - 

........ 

EO3-11070 



the Report No., the 

Report No. specification 


NOTES: 1. Enter all characters in regular size. In actually printing on reports, they will be printed in all doublesized 

characters. 

2. As shown in the table on the next pages, the Standard Program data is prepared (which is autoset 

after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the report names that need to be changed. 

3. The data of Report No. 65 and thereafter in the table on the next pages are applicable only when 

the Master-Satellite System is adopted. 

ex.) To change the names of the following reports: 

Report No. Type Standard Program New Name 

23 X X GROUP X DP GROUP 

24 GTX GTX GROUP GTX DP GROUP 


39 [X] 

23 [ST] (Report No.) 

508 [#] [#] 404 [#] 500 [#] [#] 407 [#] 

502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#] 

[ST] (Name: X DP GROUP) 

24 [ST] (Report No.) 

407 [#] 504 [#] 508 [#] [#] 404 [#] 500 [#] [#] 

407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#] 

[ST] (Name: GTX DP GROUP) 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P39 

#19 

X DP GROUP 

#20 

GTX DP GROUP 

0068

READ/RESET REPORT NAME TABLE 

- 154 - 

X: Daily Read 

Z: Daily Reset 

GTX: GT Read 

GTZ: GT Reset 

Report Report Type Standard Program 

No. 

1 Financial X X| |F|I|N|A|N|C|I|A|L| 

2 Z Z| |F|I|N|A|N|C|I|A|L| 

3 GTX G|T|X|F|I|N|A|N|C|I|A|L 

4 GTZ G|T|Z|F|I|N|A|N|C|I|A|L 

5 All Cashier X X| |C|L|E|R|K| | | | | 

6 Z Z| |C|L|E|R|K| | | | | 

7 GTX G|T|X| |C|L|E|R|K| | | 

8 GTZ G|T|Z| |C|L|E|R|K| | | 

9 Individual Cashier X X| |C|L|E|R|K| | | | | 

10 Z Z| |C|L|E|R|K| | | | | 

11 GTX G|T|X| |C|L|E|R|K| | | 

12 GTZ G|T|Z| |C|L|E|R|K| | | 

13 All Salesperson X X| |S|L|S|P|E|R|S|O|N| 

14 Z Z| |S|L|S|P|E|R|S|O|N| 

15, 16 -- vacant -- 

17 Credit Card Company Sales X X| |C|R|E|D|I|T| | | | 

18 Z Z| |C|R|E|D|I|T| | | | 

19 GTX G|T|X| |C|R|E|D|I|T| | 

20 GTZ G|T|Z| |C|R|E|D|I|T| | 

21, 22 -- vacant -- 

23 Department Group X X| |G|R|O|U|P| | | | | 

24 GTX G|T|X| |G|R|O|U|P| | | 

25 Media Sales and In-drawer Total X X| |M|E|D|I|A| |A|L|L| 

26 Hourly Range X X| |H|O|U|R|L|Y| | | | 

27 Z Z| |H|O|U|R|L|Y| | | | 

28 All Department X X| |D|P| |A|L|L| | | | 

29 Z Z| |D|P| |A|L|L| | | | 

30 GTX G|T|X| |D|P| |A|L|L| | 

31 GTZ G|T|Z| |D|P| |A|L|L| | 

32 Individual Department X X| |D|P| |I|N|D|I|V| | 

33 GTX G|T|X| |D|P| |I|N|D|I|V 

34 All Media Sales Total and Cash-in-drawer X X| |M|E|D|I|A| | | | | 

35 All PLU X X| |P|L|U| |A|L|L| | | 

36 Z Z| |P|L|U| |A|L|L| | | 

37 GTX G|T|X| |P|L|U| |A|L|L| 

38 GTZ G|T|Z| |P|L|U| |A|L|L| 

EO3-11070 


READ/RESET REPORT NAME TABLE (Continued) 

Report 

No. 

Report Type Standard Program 

39 Zone PLU X X| |P|L|U| |Z|O|N|E| | 

40 Z Z| |P|L|U| |Z|O|N|E| | 

41 GTX G|T|X| |P|L|U| |Z|O|N|E 

42 GTZ G|T|Z| |P|L|U| |Z|O|N|E 

43 Individual PLU X X| |P|L|U| |I|N|D|I|V| 

44 GTX G|T|X| |P|L|U| |I|N|D|I 

45 Inactive PLU X X| |P|L|U| |Z|E|R|O| | 

46 GTX G|T|X| |P|L|U| |Z|E|R|O 

47 to 49 -- vacant -- 

50 All Customer Files X X| |C|U|S|T| |A|L|L| | 

51 Individual Customer File X X| |C|U|S|T| |I|N|D|I|V 

52 Zero-balance Customer Files X X| |C|U|S|T| |Z|E|R|O| 

53 Credit-balance Customer Files X X| |C|U|S|T| |C|R|E|D| 

54 Debit-balance Customer Files X X| |C|U|S|T| |D|E|B|I|T 

55 Zone Customer Files X X| |C|U|S|T| |Z|O|N|E| 

56 PLU Group Sales X X| |P|L|U| |G|R|O|U|P| 

57 Z Z| |P|L|U| |G|R|O|U|P| 

58 GTX G|T|X| |P|L|U|G|R|O|U|P 

59 GTZ G|T|Z| |P|L|U|G|R|O|U|P 

60, 61 -- vacant -- 

62 PLU Merge X or Z P|L|U| |M|E|R|G|E| | | 

63, 64 -- vacant -- 

65 Terminal Open Check X N|O|T| |C|O|N|N|E|C|T| 

66 Terminal Condition Check X T|/|M| |C|H|E|C|K| | | 

67 Enforced Clear of Hold Condition Z H|O|L|D| |C|A|N|C|E|L| 

68 Manual Copy of Backup Data Z B|A|C|K| |U|P| |C|O|P|Y 

69 Read of Information Copied in 


X R|E|S|E|R|V|E| |B|U|F|F 

70 Forcible Reset of Data in 


Z R|E|S|E|R|V|E| |C|L|R| 

71 All Customer Files Z Z| |C|U|S|T| |A|L|L| | 

72 Zone Customer Files Z Z| |C|U|S|T| |Z|O|N|E| 

- 155 - 

X: Daily Read 

Z: Daily Reset 

GTX: GT Read 

GTZ: GT Reset 

EO3-11070 


PLU UNIT PRICE DOLLAR DISCOUNT/EXTRA CHARGE AMOUNT 

SETTING (Submode 40) 

Applicable for V2.0 or after 

This submode sets the dollar discount amount or the extra charge amount for PLU price. 



Repeat for another code. 

- 156 - 

EO3-11070 


Dollar Discount/ 

* 

40 [@/FOR] ➤ Extra Charge [ST] ➤ ([RTN MDSE]) |Amount| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Code 

1 to 99 


(1 to 999999; result: 

$0.01 to $9999.99) 

➤ 

➤ 

Depress the [RTN MDSE] key to 

set the Dollar Discount amount. 

* (Repeatable from here for sequentially programming Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Codes.) 

ex.) To set as follows: 

• Code 2 for Dollar Discount $1.50 

• Code 10 for Extra Charge $2.00 


40 [@/FOR] 

2 [ST] [RTN MDSE] 150 [#] 10 [ST] 200 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

...............

AGE LIMIT SETTING (Submode 41) 

Applicable for V2.0 or after 

This submode sets an age limit to purchase a sales item restricted by the programmed age limit. 



Repeat for another code. 

* 

41 [@/FOR] ➤ |Age Limit Code| [ST] ➤ |Age| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

1: Applicable to sales item 

Max. 2 digits; 

restricted by age limit 

younger than that of 

Code 2. 

2: Applicable to sales item 

restricted by age limit 

older than that of Code 1. 

01 to 99 

➤ 

* (Repeatable from here for sequentially the code.) 

NOTE: Initial setting is as follows. 

• Age of 18 is programmed for the Age Limit Code 1 

• Age of 21 is programmed for the Age Limit Code 2 

ex.) To set as follows: 

• Age of 20 for the Age Limit Code 1 

• Age of 23 for the Age Limit Code 2 


41 [@/FOR] 

1 [ST] 20 [#] 

(2 [ST]) 23 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

➤ 

- 157 - 

EO3-11070 


FOREIGN CURRENCY ROUNDING PROCESS SETTING, 1-digit type 

(Submode 48) 


- 158 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode programs the rounding process of the sale paid in foreign currencies (tendered in foreign 

currencies) and of the entries of No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency. This submode 

is applicable to the Foreign Currencies whose option “Special Rounding for Foreign Currency APPLIED 1 digit” 

is selected in KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING (Submode 23) at Key Codes 46 to 50 (Bit 7 SET & Bit 8 RESET). 



Foreign Maximum Value of the 

Post-rounded 

48 [X] ➤ Currency [ST] ➤ range of the digit [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Value 

Key No. subject to rounding 

➤ 

➤ 

Repeat for the next break entries (max. 10 breaks) 

1 to 5; 1 = [CUR1] ... 5 = [CUR5] 1 digit; 0 to 9 2 digits; 00 to 09 

NOTES: 1 When the “Post-rounded Value” is to be 10 (i.e., the final break point), the break entry is 

automatically set (refer to the example below); therefore, it does not need to be entered. Entering 

a value larger 9 for the Post-rounded Value will not cause an error. However, the rounding 

process will occur only on the least effective digit in sales entries. 

2. A maximum of 10 breaks can be programmed. 

ex.) To set the following rounding table for the [CUR2] key: 

Pre-rounded Post-rounded 

Value of the least Value 

effective digit 

0 to 2 0 (= 00) 

3 to 7 5 (= 05) 

8 to 9 10 Ignore in setting. 


2 [ST] (Key No. for [CUR2]) 

200 [#] 

705 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P48 

#2 200 

705 

0071

FOREIGN CURRENCY ROUNDING PROCESS SETTING, 2-digit type 

(Submode 49) 

Repeat for the next break entries (max. 10 breaks) 

Pre-rounded Post-rounded 

Value of the least Value 

effective digit 

00 to 24 00 

25 to 74 50 

75 to 99 100 Ignore in setting. 

- 159 - 

➤ 

EO3-11070 


This submode programs the rounding process of the sale paid in foreign currencies (tendered in foreign 

currencies) and of the entries of No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency. This submode 

is applicable to the Foreign Currencies whose option “Special Rounding for Foreign Currency APPLIED 2 digits” 

is selected in KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING (Submode 23) at Key Codes 46 to 50 (Bit 7 SET & Bit 8 SET). 



Foreign Maximum Value of the 

Post-rounded 

49 [X] ➤ Currency [ST] ➤ range of the digit [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

Value 

Key No. subject to rounding 

➤ 

1 to 5; 1 = [CUR1] ... 5 = [CUR5] 2 digits; 00 to 99 2 digit; 00 to 99 


NOTES: 1 When the “Post-rounded Value” is to be 100 (i.e., the final break point) the break entry is 

automatically set (refer to the example below); therefore, it does not need to be entered. Entering 

a value larger 99 for the Post-rounded Value will not cause an error. However, the rounding 

process will occur only on the two least effective digits in sales entries. 

2. A maximum of 10 breaks can be programmed. 

ex.) To set following rounding table for the [CUR 1] key: 


1 [ST] (Key No. for [CUR1]) 

2400 [#] 

7450 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P49 

#1 2400 

7450 

0075

- 160 - 

EO3-11070 


CREDIT CARD NO. NEGATIVE CHECK FILE PROGRAMMING (Submode 54) 

In this submode, the list of Credit Card Nos to be rejected in the REG mode is programmed. This programming 

is available only when the expansion memory is installed. 



➤ 

Repeat for other Card Nos. 

54 [X] ➤ |Card No.| [ST] ➤ |Error Status Code| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 


1 to 9 

(Each code and its 

status content is 

determined by each 

store.) 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 3,000 Card Nos can be programmed in the file (the maximum capacity varies 

depending on the RAM allocation). 

2. Each of Error Status Codes 1 to 9 should be assigned to the reason why the Card cannot be 

accepted by each store. (For example, Code 1 indicates that the valid date of the card has 

expired, Code 2 for too much balance remaining, etc.). 

3. When a Card No. contained in the Negative Check file is entered through the [CARD CHK] key 

in the REG mode, an message programmed (Standard Program is “CALL MANAGER”) and the 

Status Code (1 to 9 programmed for the Card No. in this submode) are displayed. 

Deletion of Card Nos from the Negative Check File 

54 [X] ➤ 

[ITEM CORR] 

or 

[VOID] 

➤ |Card No.| [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

Repeat for other card Nos to be deleted. 

ex.) To program the following Card Nos in the Negative Check File: 

Card No. Status Code Mode Lock: SET 

54 [X] 

1234567890123456 1 1234567890123456 [ST] 

1 [#] 

9999999999999999 2 9999999999999999 [ST] 

2 [#] 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P54 

#123456789012456 1 

#999999999999999 2 

00002 

0022

BARCODE INDIVIDUAL FLAG TYPE DESIGNATION (Submode 55) 

- 161 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is available for the Scanning System type. The processes of individual flags for the UPC In-store 

Marking Codes are designated here. As for detailed instructions of the UPC Barcode System, refer to the 

Scanning Specifications in the document of System Explanation separately issued. 



➤ 

Repeat for other Flag Values. 

55 [X] ➤ |Flag Value| [ST] ➤ |Process Type Code| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

02, 04, 11 to 

1, 2, 3, or 5 (See the 

29 (See the 

PROCESS TYPE 

FLAG TABLE 

TABLE below. Also see 

below.) 

the FLAG TABLE.) 

ex.) To set the Flag of 02 to the Process Type Code 1: 

Mode Lock: SET, enter 55 [X]. 



PHONE: 87-6437 

02 [ST] 1 [#] [AT/TL] 



NOTE: The “Flag Value” here means the actual numeric value assigned 

to the top two digits of the 13-digit barcode of the UPC In-store 

Marking Code. These two digits are usually indicated as “F 1 F 2 ”, 

as shown in the PROCESS TYPE TABLE below. 

FLAG TABLE 

Flag Value Process Type Code Available 

02 1, 2, 3 

04, 11 to 29 1, 2, 3, 5 

PROCESS TYPE TABLE 

11-14-1994 MON #1 

P55 

02 1 

Process Name Contents of the Code Code Pattern 

Type Code (F = Flag; X = Item; P = Price) 

1 Scale Non-PLU Item Price Price F1F2X1X2X3X4X5PC/DP1P2P3P4C/D Code + C/D + 4 dig. (C/D = Check Digit) 

5 dig. 1 dig. 

2 Scale Non-PLU Item Code (5 dig.) + Price (5 dig.) F1F2X1X2X3X4X5P1P2P3P4P5C/D 3 Scale Non-PLU Item Code (6 dig.) + Price (4 dig.) F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6P1P2P3P4C/D 5 PLU PLU Code (10 dig.) F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9X10C/D 0078

PLU ADDITION TO PLU ADDITIONAL TABLE FILE (Submode 64) 

This submode is used to add PLUs in the PLU Additional Table File. 

This programming is available only when the expansion memory is installed. 



64 [X] ➤ Follow the operation of Submode 4 (after “4 [X]”) in this chapter. 

NOTE: A maximum 200 PLUs can be programmed in the Additional PLU Table File. 

■ PLU MERGE 

- 162 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation is used to merge all the PLUs in the Additional Table File into the PLU Table File (Main PLU 

Table File). This is usually operated at the end of the day. 



40 ➤ [AT/TL] 

NOTE: This operation is accepted only when there is a vacant area in the Main PLU Table File enough to accept 

the number of PLUs programmed in the Additional PLU Table File. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

PLU MERGE 

0356

* This programming is applicable to V3.0 or after 

EFT KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING (Submode 65) 

KEY NAME 

[CHK TND] 

[CREDIT 1] 

[CREDIT 2] 

[DEBIT] 

[EBT CASH] 

[EBT F/S] 

This submode programs the various selective statuses of the EFT media keys. 



65 [X] ➤ |Key Code| [ST] ➤ |Bit Nos for SET status| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

1 to 8 (see the table 

below.) 

* 

Combination of Bit Nos 1 to 8; 

enter 0 for all bits to RESET status; 

see the table below.) 


programming key 

codes, the key code 

Repeat for other key codes. 

specification can be 

skipped.) 

KEY 

CODE 

1 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

➤ 

Bit 

No. 

1 Media Type: RESET: Ordinary Media SET: EFT Media 

2 Manual Card No. Entry: RESET: Prohibited SET: Allowed 

3 Off-line Authorization: RESET: Prohibited SET: Allowed 

1 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

R R R 

4 Issuance of Store Receipt: RESET: Non-issue SET: Issue 

R R R 

R R R S S R R 

R R R S S R R 

R R S R R R 

R R R S R R R 

R R R S R R R R 

➤ 

- 163 - 

EO3-11070 


5 Print of Payment Agreement RESET: Non-print SET: Print 

6 EBT Food Stamp: RESET: Taxable Total Payment SET: Food Stamp Payment 

7 MGR Intervention for Off-line Authorization: RESET: Not required SET: Required 

8 Off-line Authorization Code Entry: RESET: Not required SET: Required 








requirements.

* This programming is applicable to V3.0 or after. 

EFT INFORMATION SETTING (Submode 66) 

This submode programs the various parameters regarding the EFT process. 



- 164 - 

EO3-11070 


66 [X] ➤ 1 [ST] ➤ Character Entries for Payment Agreement (1st Line) [ST] 


➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 2 [ST] ➤ Character Entries for Payment Agreement (2nd Line) [ST] 


➤ 3 [ST] ➤ Character Entries for Payment Agreement (3rd Line) [ST] 


➤ 4 [ST] ➤ Character Entries for Payment Agreement (4th Line) [ST] 


➤ 5 [ST] ➤ |EFT Response Timer| [#] 

Max. 3 digits; 0 to 255 (sec.) 

(Standard: 10 sec.) 

➤ 

➤ 6 [ST] ➤ |No. of times of Retry for No-response Time Out| [#] 

Max. 1 digit; 0 to 9 

(Standard: 3 times) 

➤ 7 [ST] ➤ |Prompt/Processing Timer| [#] 



Repeat for another address. 

NOTE: Initial setting for Payment Agreement is as follows. 

24 20 15 10 5 1 

X | 

I A G R E E T O P A Y A B O V E 

T O T A L A M O U N T A C C O R D I N G 

T O I S S U E R ’ S A G R E E M E N T 

➤ 

1st Line 

2nd Line 

3rd Line 

4th Line

* This programming is applicable to V3.0 or after. 

EFT CARD TYPE DESCRIPTOR SETTING (Submode 67) 

This programming programs the descriptors of the various EFT cards for the data packet. 



➤ 

Repeat for another key. 

➤ 

67 [X] ➤ |Key Code| [ST] ➤ Character Entries 

max. 2 charaters 

➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

1 to 8 (See the table below.) 

* 


keys, the key code 

designation can be skipped. 

Key Code Key Name Descriptor (Initial Setting) 

1 

2 

3 

CHK TEND CK 

4 CREDIT 1 CR 

5 CREDIT 2 DS 

6 DEBIT DB 

7 EBT CASH EC 

8 EBT F/S EF 

- 165 - 

EO3-11070 


PC TRANSMISSION INFORMATION SETTING (Submode 68) 

- 166 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is effective for a system with a PC connection, and provides settings of various requirements for 

transmission with the PC. 



68 [X] ➤ 1 [ST] ➤ |POL Supervising Timer| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 



➤ 2 [ST] ➤ |Inquiry Supervising Timer| [#] 



➤ 3 [ST] ➤ |Sending Delay Timer| [#] 

Max. 2 digits; 0 to 99 (1 = 20m sec.) 

(Standard: 3 = 60m sec.) 

➤ 4 [ST] ➤ |Baud Rate Code| [#] 

1 to 4 

1: 9600 BPS (Standard) 

2: 4800 BPS 

3: 2400 BPS 

4: 1200 BPS 

Repeat for other addresses. 

NOTES: 1. The Standard Values are auto-set by a RAM Clear. 

2. When the Baud Rate is changed in the above operation, the new Baud Rate will be effective by 

turning the terminal’s power OFF and then ON. 

ex.) To set the Inquiry Supervising Timer to 10 seconds: 


2 [ST] 10 [#] [AT/TL] 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P68 

#2 10 

0080

PLU FILE SEQUENTIAL SORT CHECK (Submode 93) 

93 [X] ➤ [AT/TL] 

- 167 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation sequentially executes the checks of code BCD and same code presence for the PLU file. This 

operation is available only when the expansion memory is installed. 



Status Symbol 

OK: File is normal. 

NG: An error is found in the file. 

PLU FILE SEQUENTIAL DELETE (Submode 94) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P93 

OK 

If the same code presence is found by a “PLU FILE SEQUENTIAL SORT CHECK” operation, this operation prints 

that PLU code. This operation is available only when the expansion memory is installed. 



94 [X] ➤ [AT/TL] 

NOTES: 1. If there is more than one same code, all the codes are 

deleted by this delete operation. 

2. After this operation, the sequential sort is executed again, 

and it is confirmed that the file has no problem. 

0290 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P94 

0000000000001 

0291 

PLU code that appears 

more than once in the file.

DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING 

➤ 

Repeatable for other departments. 

........ 

Using the [DP#] Key: 

➤ 

|Dept Code| [DP#] ➤ |New Preset Price| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

- 168 - 

EO3-11070 


The preset price of each department may be set in the DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 3) 

already described. However, in setting or changing the price only but not other programmed data, the following 

operation will be more convenient. 



|New Preset Price| [DEPT] ➤ [AT/TL] 

NOTE2 

NOTE 1: With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 

99999.9 (result: $0.000 to $999.999), using the [.] key. 

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999 

(result: $0.00 to $9999.99) 

NOTE 1 

➤ 

Repeatable from here when 

the Dept Code is sequential. 


NOTE 2: The “[DEPT]” here indicates a Department Preset-code Key. When 

the [DP#] key is used, see the operation below. 

To change a preset-price department into an open department, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply 

depress the [DEPT] key (in the first operation pattern) or simply depress the [#] key (in the second operation 

pattern). Presetting a zero-price is also possible. 

ex.) To set the following preset prices of departments: 

Dept.13 ...... $1,40 

Dept.14 ...... $2,10 

OPERATION 


By the first operation pattern: 

140 [DEPT 13] 

210 [DEPT 14] 

By the second operation pattern: 

13 [DP#] 140 [#] 

(14 [DP#] 210 [#]) 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

13DP13 

14DP14 

P00 

0083 

1.40@ 

2.10@

PLU PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING, WHOLE PACKAGE 

QUANTITY CHANGING 

➤ 

|PLU Code| [PLU] ➤ |New Preset Price| [#] 


(result: $0.00 to $9999.99) 

➤ [AT/TL] 

6 or 13 digits 

* (See NOTE below.) 

....... 

➤ 

- 169 - 

EO3-11070 


The preset price of each PLU may be set in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4) already described. 

However, in setting or changing the price and/or the whole package quantity only but not other programmed data, 

the following operation will be more convenient. 

Setting or Changing Preset Price 



Repeatable for other PLUs * Repeatable from here if the PLU code is sequential. 

NOTE: With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed,” 0 to 99999.9 (result: $0.000 to $999.999) 

using the [ . ] key. 

To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply depress the 

[#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible. 

ex.) To set the following preset prices of PLUs: 

Old Price New Price 

PLU 110501 (Potato Chips) $1.50 $1.55 

PLU 120501 (Nutmeg) $0.60 $0.65 

OPERATION 


110501[PLU] 155 [#] 

120501 [PLU] 65 [#] 

[AT/TL] 


➤ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

110501 

Potato Chips 1.55@ 

120501 

Nutmeg 0.65@ 

0086

Changing the Whole Package Quantity (and the price accordingly) 

➤ 



|PLU Code| [PLU] ➤ 

New Whole 

Package [ST] 

Quantity 

➤ |New Preset Price| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

...... 

6 or 13 digits 

* 

Repeatable for other PLUs * Repeatable from here if the PLU Code is sequential. 

ex.) To set the following preset price of PLU: 

New Whole New Preset 

Package Q’ty Price 

PLU 20105 (Apple) 6 $1.25 

OPERATION 


20105 [PLU] 6 [ST] 125 [#] 

[AT/TL] 


➤ ➤ 

- 170 - 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

020105 / 6 

Apple 1.25@ 

0088

%+ AND %- PRESET RATE SETTING 

...... ...... 

- 171 - 

EO3-11070 


A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once a rate is 

preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate. If a rate is entered 

prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated instead. 



|Preset Rate| [% +] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate) 

(0.001 to 99.999(%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.) 

|Preset Rate| [% - ] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate) 

ex.) To set 10 % on [% +] Key: 

Mode Lock: SET, enter 10, depress [%+]. 

ex.) To set 5% on [%-] Key: 

Mode Lock: SET, enter 5, depress [%-]. 

To reset the rate once set: 

Enter 0, depress the required % key. 

(Then the % key will always require a manual rate entry in sale entries.) 

NOTE: When two [%+] keys or two [%-] keys are installed on the 

keyboard, two different % rates (one for each) may be preset, in 

the same manner as described above. The two rates may be 

the same or different from the other. Or only one key may be 

preset with a rate and other may remain non-preset. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



TEC 11-14-1994 STORE MON #1 


PHONE: 87-6437 P00 

Open %+ 8:00am to 7:00pm 10% 


0037 

11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

%- 5% 

0038

PRESET RATE SETTING FOR SELECTIVE ITEMIZERS (SI1 and SI2) 

|Preset Rate of SI 1| ➤ [SI1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) 

...... ...... 

|Preset Rate of SI 2| ➤ [SI/2TL] 

- 172 - 

EO3-11070 


If any of [ST1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) and [SI2/TL] keys are installed on the keyboard, a preset rate may be programmed 

on each key. 

As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next page. 



(0.001 to 99.999 (%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.) 

NOTES: 1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI % rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract from) the 

sale total is determined by a system option status selection. 

2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. 

(Then the rate is regarded as 100% if the option “Non-affect” is selected. With the option “SI 

Affects Sale Total”, some rate other than “0” should be programmed.) 

ex.) To set 7% as SI 1 preset % rate: 


7 [ST1/TL] 

Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P09 

SI1TL 7% 

The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the Main 

Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain Department or PLU items are programmed with the SI (selective 

itemizer) “net” status, the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net status items in 

registering the items, while the Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the sale. Thus, near the 

sale finalization, the operator may read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] key. 

0043

100 [DEPT 1] (SI-net) 

150 [DEPT 2] (non-SI) 


[SI/TL] (1% is preset) 

[AT/TL] 

- 173 - 

EO3-11070 


A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 and SI2 (on the preceding page), and whether the 

calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is a selective option. Whether the 

amount resulted by depressing the [SI/TL] key will print or non-print is another selective option. (Refer to 

System Option Address 5 Table.) 

The applications of this function may vary from store to store. Some stores may use it for counting the service 

stamps to be issued to the customers according to the sale amount of service-stampable items. In this case, 

the option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% for example, may be 

set to issue one service stamp for every $1.00. Thus the number of stamps to be issued to the customer is 

displayed (and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the preset % rate, but the resulted value 

(the number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total. 

Example 1) With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”: 

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print 

Dept. 1 and Dept. 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 1% of total amount of Dept. 1 “1.00” 

+ Dept. 3 “2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are to be issued to the customer in this case. The sale total “4.50” is not affected 

by the SI calculation. 

Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special discount 

sales period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to certain Departments 

and PLUs which are subject to the special discount. 

Example 2) With option “SI Special Discount”: 

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print 


150 [DEPT 2] (non-SI) 


[SI/TL] (10 % is preset) 

[AT/TL] 

“S”: SI-net Symbol 

DP01 1.00 S 

DP02 1.50 

DP03 2.00 S 

SI TL 0.03 

CASH 4.50 Number of stamps 

to be issued. 

DP01 1.00 S 

DP02 1.50 

DP03 2.00 S 

SI TL -0.03 

CASH 4.20 Discount Amount 

resulted by SI % 

On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of Dept. 1 + Dept. 3 items) is displayed and printed, and 

that amount is subtracted from the sale total. (4.50 - 0.30 = 4.20)

FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE SETTING 

|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1| ➤ [CUR1] 

...... ...... 

|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5| ➤ [CUR5] 

➤ 

- 174 - 

EO3-11070 


In this program, the rate of each foreign currencies (corresponding to the [CUR1] to [CUR5] keys) will be set. By 

setting a rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in the foreign currency value 

will be possible for sale finalization. 



0.000001 to 9999.999999 

(Use the [.] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.) 

As for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below. 

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation 

1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the foreign 

currencies. (In case of calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the same zerosuppress 

form, such as from U.S. $ to French Franc, it will be no problem even if it is calculated in the main 

currency of $ and Franc. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency such as $ or Franc to 

Japanese yen or Italian Lira, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise a wrong rate will result.) 

2. Calculate the required foreign currency value equivalent to the domestic currency value “1”. Then the 

obtained value is the Exchange Rate value to be entered in the setting operation stated above. 

For example, if the domestic currency is U.S. $: 

1¢ = xxxx.xxxxxx centimes (French Franc) 

= xxxx.xxxxxx pfennigs (Deutsche Mark) 

= xxxx.xxxxxx yen (Japanese yen) 

etc. 

Enter this value as each foreign currency rate.

ex.) To set three foreign currency rates: 

Domestic Currency ..... U.S. $ 

Assigning: [CUR 1] ..... French Franc 

[CUR 2] ..... Deutsche Mark 

[CUR 3] ..... Japanese yen 

Conditions given for Domestic and Foreign Currencies 

(The rates here are merely examples.) 

- 175 - 

EO3-11070 


(DOMESTIC) (CUR1) (CUR2) (CUR3) 

U.S. Dollar French Franc Deutsche Mark Japanese yen 

fl fl fl fl 

$1.00 = F5.3729 = DM1.7619 = (145.50) ... in Main Currency Values 

fl fl fl fl 

1 cent = 5.3729 = 1.7619 = 1.4550 ... in Subsidiary Currency Valcentimes 

pfennigs yen ues (Enter these values for 

setting.) 

KEY OPERATION for setting the rates above: 


5 [.] 3729 [CUR 1] (for French Franc) 

1 [.] 7619 [CUR 2] (for Deutsche Mark) 

1 [.] 4550 [CUR 3] (for Japanese yen) 

Resetting a Foreign Currency Rate Once Set: 

Enter “0” in place of the Exchange Rate for the Foreign Currency in 

the setting operation. Then the rate for that foreign currency will be 

reset. The Foreign Currency Key of the rate thus reset cannot be 

used in sales entries. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

TEC P00 STORE 


CUR1 PHONE: 87-64375.3729* 

Open 8:00am to 0046 7:00pm 


11-14-1994 MON #1 

TEC P00 STORE 


CUR2 PHONE: 87-6437 1.7619* 

Open 8:00am 0047 to 7:00pm 


11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

CUR3 1.455* 

0048

TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING 

...... ...... ...... ...... 

➤ 

➤ 

TYPE 3: TAX 1 % RATE ONLY 

0 [TX1/M] ➤ [ST] ➤ |TAX RATE| [AT/TL] 

........ 

(The description for the TAX RATE in TYPE 2 is also applied to this case.) 

- 176 - 

EO3-11070 


A maximum of four tax tables can be programmed (Tax 1, Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4) in accordance with installation of 

[TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], [TX4/M] keys. 

On V1.9 or after, a rate of inclusive tax can be programmed. 



TYPE 1: TAX 1 FULL BREAKS (COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC AND CYCLIC BREAKS) 

|Max. amount non-taxable [TX1/M] 

|Max. amount for 1 ¢ tax levied| [TX1/M] 

|Max. amount for 2 ¢ tax levied| [TX1/M] 

Repeat up to the “A” Break 

|Max. amount for N¢ tax levied| [TX1/M] ..... “A” Break (Non-cyclic Break Limit) 

[ST] (to indicate the completion of Non-cyclic Breaks) 

|Max. amount for N + 1¢ tax levied| [TX1/M] (beginning of Cyclic Breaks) 

|Max. amount for N + 2¢ tax levied| [TX1/M] 

Repeat up to the “B” Break (“B” Break - “A” Break + Multiple of $1.00; max. $9.00) 

[AT/TL] (to complete this tax table programming) 

NOTE: The break amount entry must be a maximum of 4 digits (1 to 9999 resulting in $0.01 to $99.99) 

TYPE 2: TAX 1 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE 

First set all the breaks up to the “A” Break entry and the [ST] key depression as shown in TYPE 1. 

|TAX RATE applied when exceeding the “A” Break amount| 

(0.0001% to 99.9999%; use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained. Examples: To set 5%, enter 5. To 

set 5.26%, enter 5.26. The fraction of the amount resulting from this % rate calculation will be rounded off.) 

[AT/TL] (to complete this tax programming)

- 177 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. For Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4 table programming, follow the same procedure in TYPE 1, 2, or 3 on the 

preceding page, using [TX2/M] or [TX3/M] or [TX4/M] instead of [TX1/M]. 

2. If multiple tax tables are programmed, the Tax 1 table must be set first, then Tax 2, Tax 3, and 

Tax 4. The Tax 1 table setting will automatically reset all of the old Tax 1, 2, 3. and 4 tables if they 

have been programmed. 

3. No second depression of the [ST] key is allowed within one tax table programming. 

4. A maximum of 99 breaks can be entered for Tax 1 to Tax 4 tables altogether. 

5. For inclusive tax (Tax 3 or Tax 4), tax table programming using a rate only is available. Tax table 

programming using a tax break is unavailable. The inclusive tax feature is available on V1.9 or 

after. 

ex. 1) TAX 1 FULL BREAKS 

Tax Table Key Operation 

Amount Tax 

Range Levied Mode Lock: SET 

$0.00 to $0.10 0¢ 10 [TX1/M] 

$0.11 to $0.22 1¢ 22 [TX1/M] 

$0.23 to $0.39 2¢ 39 [TX1/M] 

$0.40 to $0.56 3¢ 56 [TX1/M] 

$0.57 to $0.73 4¢ 73 [TX1/M] 

$0.74 to $0.90 5¢ 90 [TX1/M] 

$0.91 to $1.08 6¢ 108 [TX1/M] 

..... “A” Break [ST] 

$1.09 to $1.24 7¢ 124 [TX1/M] 

$1.25 to $1.41 8¢ 141 [TX1/M] 

$1.42 to $1.58 9¢ 158 [TX1/M] 

$1.59 to $1.74 10¢ 174 [TX1/M] 

$1.75 to $1.92 11¢ 192 [TX1/M] 

$1.93 to $2.08 12¢ 208 [TX1/M] 

..... “B” Break [AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

TAX1 

00 $0.10 

01 $0.22 

02 $0.39 

03 $0.56 

04 $0.73 

05 $0.90 

06 $1.08 

* 

07 $1.24 

08 $1.41 

09 $1.58 

10 $1.74 

11 $1.92 

12 $2.08 

** 

0058

ex. 2) TAX 2 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE 


Amount Tax 

Range Levied Mode Lock: SET 

$0.00 to $0.09 0¢ 9 [TX2/M] 

$0.10 to $0.29 1¢ 29 [TX2/M] 

$0.30 to $0.59 2¢ 59 [TX2/M] 

$0.60 to $0.84 3¢ 84 [TX2/M] 

$0.85 to $1.12 4¢ 112 [TX2/M] 

..... “A” Break [ST] 

5% is applied to any amount exceeding 

the “A” Break. 

50000 

[AT/TL] 

ex. 3) TAX 10 % RATE ONLY 



10% is applied to any sale amount. 0 

100000 

[TX3/M] 

[ST] 

[AT/TL] 

- 178 - 

EO3-11070 




PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

TAX2 

00 $0.09 

01 $0.29 

02 $0.59 

03 $0.84 

04 $1.12 

* 

5% 

0064 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

TAX3 

00 $0.00 

* 

10% 

0065

GST RATE SETTING 

This operation sets the rate of GST (Goods and Service Tax) in CANADA. 



|GST Rate| ➤ [GST/M] 

...... 

0.01 to 99.99 (%) 

(Use the [.] key if the decimal portion is contained.) 

To reset the rate once set: 


Enter 0, depress the [GST/M] key. 

ex.) To set the GST rate to 12%: 

OPERATION 


12 [GST/M] 

STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING 

|Store/Register No.| ➤ [#] 

...... 

- 179 - 

EO3-11070 


A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be printed on every 

receipt and every transaction on journal. 






PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

GST 12% 

0069

- 180 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in the above 

operation, “#1234” will always be printed as the Register No. 

ex.) To set the following: 3001 

OPERATION 


3001 [#] 

8. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

P00 

The programmed data entered in the preceding chapter can be read for verification purposes. 

The print format of each program reading is almost the same as on the program receipt, except that “PX” and a 3digit 

number are printed instead of printing “P” and a 2-digit number. 


OPERATION Mode Lock: X or SET 

1. To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1,” then each Submode No., and 

finally depress the [AT/TL] key. 

For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (STORE NAME/MESSAGE, COMMERCIAL 

MESSAGE PROGRAMMING), operate: 

1 0 1 ➤ 

[AT/TL] 

Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit number.) 

Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data. 

NOTE: Data of Submodes 5, 6 cannot be read. 

0071 

#3001

1 0 0 ➤ [AT/TL] 

Enter any amount. ➤ Depress [TXBL TL] 

........ 

Displays the entered amount. 

........ 

Displays the tax amount 

(Tax 1 + Tax 2 + Tax 3 + 

Tax 4) is displayed, 

issuing a receipt such as 

below. 

- 181 - 



PHONE: 87-6437 



11-14-1994 MON #1 

PX 

$100.00 

TAX1 $6.00 

TAX2 $5.00 

TAX3 $4.00 

TAX4 $3.00 

0076 

EO3-11070 


2. To read out the data of programming operations without a Submode No., the following operation will read all the 

data together: 

To read the data of the following operations: 

• % + and % - PRESET RATE 

• SELECTIVE ITEMIZER RATE 

• FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE 

• TAX TABLE (For tax calculation test, refer to the next page.) 

• GST RATE 

3. Zone destination is possible in reading the PLU TABLE: 

1 0 4 ➤ [ST] ➤ |Zone -start PLU Code| [@/FOR] |Zone-end PLU Code| ➤ [AT/TL] 

NOTE: On depressing the [AT/TL] key, the programmed data will be printed. To abort printing once started, 

depress the [ITEM CORR] or [VOID] key. The reading operation is immediately stopped halfway. 

Tax Calculation Test 


OPERATION Mode Lock: X or SET 

NOTE: Whether Taxes 1 to 4 amounts calculated are 

printed or not depends on the selection of “RE- 

PORT ITEM PRINT/NON-PRINT SETTING 

(Submode 28).” 

Entered Amount 

Tax 1 amount calculated 



Tax 4 amount calculated


(M/S Level) 

EO8-11092 

MA-1350-2 SERIES

MA-1650-4 M/S LEVEL 



Chapter page 

1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................. 1 

2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW ......................................................................... 2 

3. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE ................................................... 3 

4. RTR DECLARATION, TERMINAL DESIGNATION ............................ 5 

5. MASTER-SATELLITE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING............................ 7 

6. DLLs (Down Line Loading) ............................................................. 19 

7. RESERVATION AND IN-LINE REPORTS ........................................ 24 

8. INQUIRIES ........................................................................................ 25 

9. BACKUP DATA CONTROL .............................................................. 27 

10. TRANSACTION DATA CAPTURE ................................................... 30 

11. TRANSMISSION ERROR ................................................................. 31 

12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS ....................................................... 33 

EO3-11070

1. INTRODUCTION 

- 1 - 

EO3-11070 


This programming manual describes information on programming and other related operations of the MA-1650 

Master-Satellite System. 

Please start reading this manual after going through the MA-1650 Programming Manual for the stand-alone level. 

By adding the IFU Board for Master-Satellite, a Batch-consolidation or Scanning system of a maximum of 16 terminals 

can be built. By connecting a PC (which requires another IFU board separately sold), a Transaction Data Capture 

system is possible. 

Most of the programming operations for the stand-alone level are still effective in the Master-Satellite System. 

However, those operations that need to be changed for the Master-Satellite system level are to be described in this 

manual. 

Especially for operation procedures by cashiers and manager respectively, please refer to the M/S Level of the MA- 

1650 Owner’s Manual which is separately issued.

2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW 

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 

PC 

RS-232C 

Master 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 

EFT 

Satellite 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 

EFT 

Backup Master 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 

EFT 

Batch-consolidation/Scanning System: Max. 6 terminals 

Master Terminal ... 1 unit 

Backup Master Terminal ... 1 unit 

Satellite Terminal ... Max. 14 units 

or 

Master Terminal ... 1 unit 

Satellite Terminal ... Max. 14 units 

Remote Slip Printer: DRS-207 

Scanner: OCIA Interface Type 

Scale: Parallel Scale 

- 2 - 

Satellite 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 

EFT 

NOTE: EFT terminal can be connected to the system on V3.0 or after. 

RS-485 

Satellite 

Terminal 

EO3-11070 



Scanner 

Scale 

EFT

3. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE 

3.1 TO START-UP USING THE MA-1650 TERMINALS ONLY 

 

including Backup Master Terminal 

1. RAM Clear 

↓ 

1. RAM Clear 

2. RAM Allocation Setting 

↓ 

Set M/S System selection, various 

2. In-line ID No. Setting 

system requirements, and allocation. 

Backup master = 2 

↓ 

Satellites = 3 to 6 

3. In-line ID No. Setting 

↓ 

Master = 1 

3. In-line Transmission 

↓ 

Information Setting 

4. In-line Transmission 

Information Setting 

only in case of changing the standard 

set value 

↓ 

only in case of changing the 

standard set value. 

5. SFKC Programming 

Set the [RTR] key on the keyboard. 

↓ 

6. Terminal Connection Table 

Set all the terminals to be connected 

to the system. 

↓ 

7. RAM Allocation DLL 

↓ 

➤ 

8. Perform various programming operations. 

↓ 

9. Perform DLL of the programmed data (including 

the Terminal Connection Table). 

↓ 

➤ 

10. Manual Copy of Backup Data 

(in case a Backup Master is contained 

in the system) 

↓ 

➤ 

11. RTR Declaration Cancel 

➤ 

Daily operation starts. 

- 3 - 

➤ 

EO3-11070 


3.2 TO START-UP USING A PC OR A PL-3 

- 4 - 

EO3-11070 


To perform start-up using the PC or the PL-3, refer to the stand-alone level start-up procedure. 

1) When performing a DLL directed from the PC, only the terminals actually connected should be designated 

in the terminal list attached to the PC command. 

2) To perform start-up using the PL-3, install programming data in the master terminal only and download 

these data to the satellite terminals.

4. RTR DECLARATION, TERMINAL DESIGNATION 

4.1 RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION 

- 5 - 

EO3-11070 


By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs (DLLs, Consolidated Read/Reset Report 

takings, etc.) can be performed. 


OPERATION Mode Lock: SET, X, Z, or MGR 

Depress [RTR] 

NOTES: 1. While a PC job is under way (a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the PC), this RTR 

Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while this RTR Declaration is on, no PC jobs are possible. 

2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in REG, MGR, or - mode are possible. 

3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed. 

4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following are jobs to be allowed: 

• Programming Operations 

• DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals) 

• Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings 

• Manual Copying of Backup Data 

5. The [RTR] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention in Key Status Programming 

(Submode 23). 

6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data, the RTR 

Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under way. 

7. If the option “Compulsion of Data Sending to PC” is selected, the RTR Declaration is not possible 

until sending the reset data (the consolidation data) to PC is completed. 

4.2 RTR DECLARATION CANCEL 

By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal when the RTR Declaration is on, the RTR Declaration ON 

status is canceled. 


OPERATION Mode Lock: SET, X, Z, or MGR 

Depress [RTR] 

NOTE: If the Backup Error Flag is ON (the standard error message is “PLEASE BACK UP”), it means that 

manual copying of Backup Data is required, and therefore the RTR Declaration Cancel is not accepted 

until copying is completed.

4.3 TERMINAL DESIGNATION 

[#] ➤ |Register No.| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

...... 

Enter the Register No. 

of the Terminal subject 

to the in-line service 

operations to follow. 

Repeat for other terminals if more 

are subject to the in-line service 

operation. 

- 6 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation can be performed before any in-line service operation. When this operation is skipped, no specific 

terminals are designated, i.e., the in-line service operations will be performed to all the terminals. 


OPERATION Mode Lock: SET, X, or Z (depending on the in-line service operations to follow) 

RTR Declaration ON Status (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp should be illuminated) 

To be operated on the Master Terminal only. 

NOTE: The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled by changing the 

position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by turning OFF and ON the power of the 

terminal. The designation is automatically canceled on completion of the operation to follow or when 

a new designation is operated. 

ex.) To designate the following Terminal out of two terminals in the system: 

Terminal ID No. 3: Register No. 3003 

Mode Lock: SET (if operated before DLLs) 

The RTR Declaration must be ON (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp must be 

illuminated; if not, depress the [RTR] key to declare RTR status). 

[#] 3003 [#] [AT/TL] 

(Issues a receipt, printing the Register Nos of the terminals designated 

in the above operation.) 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

P00 

03 #3003 

0023 14:33TM

5. MASTER-SATELLITE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 

- 7 - 

EO3-11070 


This chapter describes on settings required for the Master-Satellite System and on remarks and notes for the settings. 

As for the settings for the Stand-alone level, refer to the Programming Manual for Stand-alone Level. 

Most of the settings here are to be performed on the Master Terminal, and those programmed data will be loaded 

to each Satellite Terminal by DLL operations described in Chapter 6. 

The following are the programming submodes that need changes from the Stand-alone level: 

SFKC PROGRAMMING (BLIND Mode) 

Be certain to set the [RTR] key (SFKC 138) on the Master Terminal. This key is to be used in settings, DLLs, 

and other in-line service jobs that will be described in this manual. 

CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 2) 

Select the “Floating Cashier Feature” or the “Non-floating Cashier Feature” in the RAM Allocation Setting. 

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4) 

Select “PLU to be inquired” or “PLU not to be inqured” in the RAM Allocation Setting. (The status “PLU to be 

inquired” (inquired to the Center File) is obtained when Expansion Memory is used.) 

SYSTEM OPTION PROGRAMMING (Submode 18) 

By performing a RAM Clear after connecting the M/S IFU Board to the CPU Board, setting of System Option 

Address 46 (IN-LINE OPTION) will be effective. (Refer to the Programming Manual for the stand-alone level.) 

CUSTOMER FILE CODE (Submode 15) 

The Customer Files (Check Tracks) are always programmed in the Center File (that is subject to inquiries) in 

the Master-Satellite System. 

CREDIT CARD No. NEGATIVE CHECK FILE PROGRAMMING (Submode 54) 

The Negative Card Files are always programmed in the Center file (that is subject to inquiries) in the Master- 

Satellite System (only when Expansion Memory is used). 

PLU ADDITION TO PLU ADDITIONAL TABLE (Submode 64) 

It is operable when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected in the RAM Allocation Setting, it can be operated 

only on the Master Terminal. 

PLUs added in the Additional PLU Table (Submode 64 and Urgent Maintenance) is to be merged into the PLU 

Main Table by the PLU Merge operation. 

OPERATION Mode Lock: X or Z (The IN-LINE Lamp must be illuminated) 

40 [AT/TL] 

Furthermore, there are some other programming operations that need to be set for the Master-Satellite System 

only, such as DISPLAY MESSAGE, ERROR MESSAGE, etc. Therefore, also refer to the Programming Manual 

for Stand-alone Level.

- 8 - 

EO3-11070 


Below and on the following page are the list of programming items specified to be programmable or 

unprogrammable in accordance with the Terminal level. 

*: Programmable / Blank: Unprogrammable 

S/A: Stand-alone 

M: Master Terminal (when RTR Declaration is ON) 

S: Satellite Terminal (including Backup Master and Master Terminal with RTR Declaration is OFF). 

List of Programming Operations on Terminals 

Programming Item Mode Submode Terminal Level 

S/A M S 

RAM Clear BLIND --- * * * 

Data Clear BLIND --- * * * 

Status Clear BLIND --- * * * 

SFKC BLIND --- * * * 

Store Name/Message & Commercial Message SET 1 * * * 

Cashier Code & Name SET 2 * * 

Department Table SET 3 * * 

PLU Table SET 4 * * 

Time SET 5 * * * 

Date SET 6 * * * 

Hourly Range Table SET 7 * * 

Amount Limit for Function Keys SET 8 * * * 

Financial Report Item Name SET 9 * * 

Print Line Item Name SET 10 * * 

System Option SET/BLIND 11 or 18/18 * * * 

Non-taxable Amount Limit SET 12 * * 

Minor Group Name SET 13 * * 

Major Group Name SET 14 * * 

Customer File Code &Name SET 15 * * 

Display Upper-row Message SET 17 * * 

Combination Report Table SET 19 * * * 

Salesperson Code & Name SET 20 * * 

Credit Co., ID & Name SET 21 * * 

Endorsement Message SET 22 * * * 

Key Status SET 23 * * 

Tare Table & General Weight SET 26 * * 

PLU Preset-code Key SET 27 * * * 

Report Item Print/Non-print SET 28 * * 

PLU Group Name SET 29 * * 

Comment Message Programming (Available for V1.9 or after) SET 30 * * * 

Display Message SET 31 * * * 

Error Message SET 32 * *

List of Programming Operations on Terminals (Continued) 

Programming Item Mode Submode Terminal Level 

S/A M S 

Media Pick Up Warning SET 33 * * 

Function Key SET 34 * * * 

Negative Amount Key Limit SET 35 * * 

Drawer Warning Time SET 38 * * 

Read/Reset Report Name SET 39 * * 

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount SET 40 * * 

Age Limit Table SET 41 * * 

Foreign Currency Rounding Table, 1-digit type SET 48 * * 

Foreign Currency Rounding Table, 2-digit type SET 49 * * 

Credit Card No. Negative Check File SET 54 * * 

Barcode Individual Flag Type SET 55 * * 

Additional PLU Table (“PLU to be inquired” system) SET 64 * * 

PC Transmission Information SET 68 * * 

Terminal Connection Table SET 69 * * 

In-line Transmission Information SET 70 * * 

In-line ID No. SET 77 * * * 

RAM Allocation BLIND 79 * * 

Table Clear BLIND 91 * * 

PLU File Sequential Sort (“PLU to be inquired” system) BLIND 93 * * 

PLU File Sequential Delete (“PLU to be inquired” system) BLIND 94 * * 

Department Price Change SET --- * * 

PLU Price Change SET --- * * 

Percent Rate SET --- * * * 

Selective Itemizer Rate SET --- * * * 

Foreign Currency Rate SET --- * * 

Tax Table SET --- * * 

GST Rate SET --- * * 

Store/Register No. SET --- * * * 

* Programming items of Submodes 40 and 41 are applicable for V2.0 or after. 

- 9 - 

EO3-11070 


PLU TABLE ADDITION/CHANGE/DELETION WITH DLL (Submode 63) 

operation 

procedure 

surrounded 

by this line 

is the same 

as the 

operation in 

Submode 4. 

Repeat for 

other PLUs. 




the same PLU 


correction. 

[ST] 

Address 1: Link Department 

1 [ST] 

Address 2: PLU Name 

2 [ST] 


3 [ST] 


4 [ST] 


5 [ST] 


6 [ST] 

Address 7: Unit Price of Indiv. 

Split Package for HI-CONE PLU 

or Tare 2 Rate 

7 [ST] 

Address 8: Whole Package Quantity 

8 [ST] 

Address 9: PLU Group No. 

9 [ST] 

Address 10: Link-PLU Table No. 

10 [ST] 

Address 11: Tare Table No. 

11 [ST] 

Address 12: Unit Weight or 

Dollar Discount/Extra 

Charge Code 

12 [ST] 

Address 13: Mix & Match Group No. 

13 [ST] 


- 10 - 

Barcoed Scanning 

|PLU Code| [PLU] 

for sequential-coded item only 

|Department Code| [#] 

(1 to 99) 



|Price| [#] 






|Unit Price of Indiv. Split 

Package or Tare 2 Rate| [#] 


|Whole Package Quantity| [#] 


|PLU Group No.| [#] 


|Link-PLU Table No.| [#] 


|Tare Table No.| [#] 


|Unit Weight Table Code or Dollar 

Discount/Extra Charge Code| [#] 


|Mix & Match Group No.| [#] 

(1 to 255; 0 to reset) 

EO3-11070 


• For a system with the feature “PLU not to be inquired” selected 

The data entered on the Master Terminal is immediately loaded into the Satellite Terminals, item by item. 

• For a system with the feature “PLU not to be inquired” selected 

The data entered on the Master Terminal is immediately programmed in the center file owned by the Master 

Terminal itself. 

CONDITION All the terminals: After PLU Daily and GT Resets (when the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is selected) 

Master Terminal: Anytime outside a sale (when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected) 

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated

Deletion 

- 11 - 

EO3-11070 


CONDITION The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a sale, 

programming, or report taking operations. (When the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is 

selected) 

The sales data of the required PLUs are zero, and anytime outside a sale for the Master 

Terminal (when the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is selected) 

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

63 [X] ➤ [ITEM CORR] ➤ |PLU Code| [PLU] ➤ [ST] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 


Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted. 

➤

TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE SETTING (Submode 69) 

- 12 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is required for in-line services. Enter the In-line ID No. and the Register No. of each terminal 

(including the Master Terminal) connected to the in-line cable. 



69 [X] ➤ |In-line ID No.| [ST] ➤ |Register No.| [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

........ 

1 to 6 

(NOTES 1 & 2 below) 

* 

➤ 

0 to 999999 


Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master Terminal 

itself. (Max. 16 terminals for the Scanning System Type or PLU Manual 

Entry System Type, including the Master Terminal.) 

........ 


programming Inline 

ID Nos, the Inline 

ID specification 


NOTES: 1. In-line ID No.: Master Terminal ... 1 (fixed) 

Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ... 2 (fixed) 

Satellite Terminals ... 3 to 16 (max. 14 terminals) 

2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the same as those 

programmed for the terminal in IN-LINE TERMINAL ID SETTING (Submode 77) and STORE/ 

REGISTER NO. SETTING (no submode) in Chapter 7 of the Programming Manual for standalone 

level. 

3. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in place of the Inline 

ID No. in the above operation pattern. 

4. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate: 

69 [X] → 0 [AT/TL] 

5. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is performed, the files occupied by the deleted 

terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) is canceled. Therefore, a deleting operation 

should be performed only when the system is to be re-built or a terminal is to be detached from 

the system. 

ex.) To set Master Terminal and a Satellite Terminal in the connection table 

(total of two terminals in the in-line system): 

Master Terminal ID No. 1 Register No. 111101 

Satellite Terminal ID No. 3 Register No. 333303 

Mode Lock: SET / and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

69 [X] 

1 [ST]111101 [#] (for the Master Terminal) 

3 [ST]333303 [#] (for the Satellite Terminal) 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

P6 9 

01 #111101 

03 #333303 

0014 14:21TM

IN-LINE TRANSMISSION INFORMATION SETTING (Submode 70) 

This submode provides settings of various requirements for in-line transmission. 



70 [X] ➤ 1 [ST] ➤ |LLR Receive Timer| 


(1 = 100 ms) 

[#] 

(Standard: 50 = 5000 ms = 5 sec.) 

➤ 2 [ST] ➤ |PR Receive Timer| 


(1 = 100 ms) 

[#] 


➤ 

➤ 3 [ST] ➤ |IRT Receive Timer| 


(1 = 100 ms) 

[#] 


➤ 

➤ 4 [ST] ➤ |Batch Receive Timer| [#] 


(1 = 100 ms) 


➤ 

➤ [AT/TL] 

NOTE: The standard values are auto-set by a RAM Clear. 

ex.) To set the following values: 

• LLR Receive Timer (6000 ms) 

• PR Receive Timer (7000 ms) 

• IRT Receive Timer (8000 ms) 

• Batch Receive Timer (9000 ms) 

* 

* 

* 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated, Enter 70, depress [X] 

1 [ST] 60 [#] 

2 [ST] 70 [#] 

3 [ST] 80 [#] 

4 [ST] 90 [#] [AT/TL] 

- 13 - 


programming the 

address, the 

address No. 

specification can 

be skipped. 

EO3-11070 




PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

P70 

#1 0060 

#2 0070 

#3 0080 

#4 0090 

#5 0100 

0037 15:03TM

DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING WITH DLL 

(Submode 72) 

- 14 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is used to newly set or change preset prices to required departments, and loads the price data into 

Satellite Terminals. 

CONDITION Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite 


➤ 

|New Preset Price| [DEPT] 

72 [X] ➤ 


(result: $0.00 to $9999.99) 

➤ [AT/TL] 

➤ 

➤ 

...... 

|Dept Code| [DP#] ➤ |New Preset Price| [#] 


➤ 

(Department Preset-code Key) 

* 

➤ 

➤ 

* For sequentially programming the department, 

the Dept Code specification can be skipped. 

NOTES: 1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, it sends a DLL-start command to the 

designated terminals, makes the terminals in HOLD condition, and executes DLL. After DLL is 

completed, it sends a DLL-end command to each terminal and releases the HOLD condition. 

2. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the department is set with a zero price. 

When the New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [DEPT] or [#] is simply depressed, it will be 

an open-price department.

PLU PRICE CHANGE WITH DLL (Submode 73) 

- 15 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is used to change prices of PLUs and/or the Whole Package Quantity changes of Split Package 

Pricing PLUs existent in the PLU Table files. 

CONDITION Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite 

(when the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is selected) 

Any time outside a sale for Master 

(when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected) 


Can be skipped (for non-Split Pricing type 

or when Whole Package Quantity is 1.) 

73 [X] ➤ |PLU Code| [PLU] ➤ |New Whole Package Quantity| [ST] 

➤ 

Repeat for 

other PLUs. 


➤ 

* 

➤ 

➤ |New Preset Price| 


➤ [#] ➤ [AT/TL] 

to make open-price PLU 

* (Repeatable from here for sequentially programming PLU Codes.) 

NOTES: 1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, it sends a DLL-start command to the 

designated terminals, makes the terminals in HOLD condition, and executes DLL. After DLL is 

completed, it sends a DLL-end command to each terminal and releases the HOLD condition (for 

a system with the feature “PLU not to be inquired” selected). 

2. A maximum of 100 PLUs’ prices can be changed in one operation sequence of this submode. 

3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero price. When the 

New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will be an open-price PLU. 

➤

TERMINAL ID SETTING (Submode 77) 

- 16 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals). It must be 

operated separately on each terminal since the Terminal ID should vary from terminal to terminal. The data set 

in this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service operations. 



77 [X] ➤ |Terminal ID No.| ➤ [AT/TL] 

Assign No. of 1 to 16. 

1: Master 

2: Backup Master 

3 to 16: Satellites 

ex.) To assign Terminal ID No. 4 to the terminal used as a Satellite 

Terminal of the in-line system: 


Enter 4, depress [AT/TL] 

NOTE: Be certain not to set the same terminal ID No. to terminals on the 

in-line system. 

If terminals with the same ID No. exist on the in-line system, 

malfunction may occur. 

At this time, it is necessary to execute the status clear for all the 

terminals on the in-line system. 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

P77 

04 

0011 14:16TM

RAM ALLOCATION SETTING (Submode 79) 

- 17 - 

EO3-11070 


This submode is almost the same as the same submode stated in the Programming Manual for the stand-alone 

level, except that the submode here specifies the RAM allocation in the Master-Satellite System. 

CONDITION After a RAM Clear 


Code to designate Codes to designate 

79 [X] ➤ 1 [#] ➤ Expansion Memory [#] ➤ System Setting [#] 

Capacity 


(combination of 1, 2, 3 and 4) 

(See ** below.) 

[AT/TL] 

➤ 

➤ 

...... 

M/S system 

designation 

1 digit (0 to 5) 

(See * below.) 

➤ |Number of Cashiers| 


➤ [ST] 

➤ 

➤ |Number of PLUs| 


➤ [ST] 

➤ 

➤ |Number of Check Tracks| 


➤ [ST] 

➤ 

➤ |Number of Data Capture Records| 


➤ [ST] 

➤ 

➤ |Number of Negative Card Nos| 


➤ [ST] 

➤ 

* Code to designate Expansion Memory Capacity: 

0: No Expansion Memory (i.e. with Standard Memory only) 

1: 512 KB 

2: 1 MB 

3: 2 MB 

4: 3MB 

5: 4MB 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

(See *** for the value 

of each item.) 

Depressing the [ST] key without a numeric value entry will set 

the value currently displayed. 

(The value displayed indicates the programmable maximum 

number of each item for the unallocated area in the RAM.)

Item Default Value Value range when Value range when 

(Number of:) (auto-set after a Standard Memory Expansion Memory 

RAM Clear) is used is used 

Cashiers 15 1 to 15 1 to 99 

PLUs 900 0 to 1,500 0 to 65,000 


Check Tracks 0 0 0 to 3,000 

Data Capture Records 0 0 0 to 65,000 

Negative Check 

Card Nos. 

0 0 0 to 3,000 

- 18 - 

EO3-11070 


** Codes to designate System Setting (Combine the following four codes in a maximum of 4 digits. For 

example, enter 12 to designate 1 and 2.): 

1: “Floating Cashier” feature is selected. 

2: “PLU to be inquired” feature is selected. 

3: Check Track Expansion Memory is used. 

4: CVS Spec. is used. 

NOTES: 1) The “Floating Cashier” feature is possible with Standard Memory or Expansion Memory. 

2) When no expansion memory is used, designation of the codes 2 to 4 causes an error. 

Furthermore, to use the CVS spec., the expansion memory of 2MB or more is necessary. 

3) When the system setting code 4 (CVS spec.) is selected, all other system setting codes (1 to 3) 

are forcibly programmed. 

*** 

No setting for the Number of “Data Capture Records” and “Negative Check Card Nos.” will be possible unless the 

Expansion Memory is used. 

NOTES: 1. The minimum unit for setting the number of PLUs, Check Tracks, or Data Capture Records or 

Negative Check Nos. is 100. 

2. Even when a large area remains to be unallocated in the RAM, setting of any item cannot exceed 

its value range specified in the table above. 

3. When any of the values already set are to be changed even during the entire setting operation 

sequence, complete the submode first by depressing the [AT/TL] key, then start the submode 

again from the first after executing the Table Clear or the RAM Clear. 

4. The Expansion Memory capacity must match the installed RAM capacity. When Check Tracks, 

Data Capturing, or Negative Card Nos. are used, select the corresponding System Option 

settings. 

5. When using the floating cashier feature, select the Code Entry Method. 

6. For a system with the CVS spec. selected, value range with expansion memory used is 0 to 

30,000.

VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA 

The programmed data can be read for verification purposes. 

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale (Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method) 

OPERATION Mode Lock: X or SET with IN-LINE Lamp illuminated or extinguished. 

(Operable on any type of terminal (Master, Backup Master, Satellites)) 

1 x x ➤ 

[AT/TL] 

Submode No. at programming 

69: TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE 

70: IN-LINE TRANSMISSION INFORMATION 

77: TERMINAL ID 

- 19 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: Verifications listed in the stand-alone level are also available on all the terminals of the in-line system.

6. DLLs (Down Line Loadings) 

5 0 1 ➤ [AT/TL] 

- 20 - 

EO3-11070 


The DLL operations will send and load the programmed data of the Master Terminal (the terminal file portion 

described in Chapter 7 in the Programming Manual for the stand-alone level) into the Satellite Terminals. Thus, in 

an in-line system, program data are mostly generated or changed on the Master Terminal, and the Satellite Terminals 

only wait for the data sent from the Master Terminal through DLL operations. All the DLLs in this chapter are operated 

on the Master Terminal only. 

The DLL operations are expected to be executed in the System Start-up Procedure, as well as in any necessary 

occasion when any additional data are programmed or any pre-programmed data are changed on the Master 

Terminal. 

The following are DLL operations, among which required ones may be chosen according to the requirements of data 

to be loaded for each occasion. 

Before going into DLL operations, please be certain that the Master Terminal and Satellite Terminals have gone 

through the respective programming requirements before DLLs. These requirements are listed in Chapter 3 

(SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE). 

When a DLL process has not normally ended, the Master Terminal will be in the condition of accepting a RETRY or 

INCOMPLETE ENDING (described in Chapter 12). On an INCOMPLETE ENDING, a receipt is issued with the 

unopened Register Nos printed. 

When a DLL is executed and there are any DLL-incomplete terminals, the Master Terminal will be in the condition 

of accepting a RETRY or INCOMPLETE ENDING. On an INCOMPLETE ENDING, a receipt is issued with the DLLincomplete 

Register Nos printed. 

CONDITION Master Terminal and the terminals subject to the DLL: 

Sign-OFF is not necessarily required for the Cashier Code Entry type 

OPERATION Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON 

Master Terminal: Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

1. To execute a DLL operation, first enter “5”, then the Submode No., and finally depress the [AT/TL] key. 

Submode No. at programming (add “0” on top to a 1-digit Submode No.) 

NOTES: “06” (for Date) is not available; both Time and Date will be DLLed by 

entering “05.” 

“18” (for Dealer System Options) is not available; Dealer System 

Option will be DLLed by entering “11”. 

Neither “15” (for Customer File Code & Name) nor “54” (for Credit Card 

No. Negative Check File) are available because they are in the Center 

File. 

Always attach “5” on top.

2. For those data programmed with no Submode No., operate the following for DLLs: 

5 0 0 ➤ [AT/TL] 

“500” is fixed for DLLs of the following programmed contents: 

• Percent Rate 

• Selective Itemizer Rate 

• Foreign Currency Rate 

• Tax Table 

• GST Rate 

3. The following are provided as Entire Program DLLs: 

1) Entire Program DLL 1 

5 9 0 ➤ [AT/TL] 

Program Contents subject to DLL: 

All the programmed tables listed on the following pages except the RAM Allocation. 

2) Entire Program DLL 2 

5 9 1 ➤ [AT/TL] 

Program Contents subject to DLL: 

All the programmed tables except the following items: 

• SFKC 

• System Option 

• PLU Preset-code Key 

• Function Key 

• RAM Allocation 

- 21 - 

EO3-11070 


DLL Job List 

- 22 - 

EO3-11070 


DLL Item Code Condition Remarks 

SFKC 576 After all Daily & GT The DLL is not executed to termi- 

Resets nals with a different keyboard type. 

Store Name/Message, Commercial 

Message 

501 Anytime 

Cashier Code & Name 502 After All Cashier Operable only when the “Non-float- 

Daily & GT Resets ing Cashier” feature is selected. 

(For Floating Cashier, the file is in 

the Center File and programmed 

on the Master only.) 

Department Table 503 After Department 

/PLU Daily & GT 

Resets 

PLU Table 504 After PLU Daily & Operable only when the feature 

GT Resets “PLU not to be inquired” is selected. 

Date & Time 505 Anytime 

Hourly Range 507 After Hourly Resets 

Amount Limit for Function Keys 508 Anytime 

Financial Report Item Name 509 After Financial 

Daily & GT Resets 

Print Line Item Name 510 Anytime 

System Option 511 After Financial 

Daily Resets 

All addresses (Submodes 11 & 18) 

Non-taxable Amount Limit 512 After Financial 

Daily Resets 

Minor Group Name 513 Anytime 

Major Group Name 514 Anytime 

Display Upper-row Message 517 Anytime 

Combination Report Table 519 Anytime 

Salesperson Code & Name 520 Anytime 

Credit Card Co. ID & Name 521 Anytime 

Endorsement Message 522 Anytime 

Key Status 523 Anytime 

Link PLU Table 525 Anytime Operable only when the feature 

“PLU not to be inquired” is selected. 

Tare Table & General Weight 526 Anytime 

PLU Preset-code Key 527 Anytime If Preset-code keys of SFKC 96 

need to be changed on an individual 

Satellite terminal, set them 

again in Submode 27 on that terminal. 

Report Item Print/Non-print 528 Anytime 

PLU Group Name 529 Anytime 

Comment Message 530 Anytime Available on V1.9 or after 

Display Message 531 Anytime 

Error Message 532 Anytime 

Media Pick Up Warning 533 After Financial 

Daily Resets

DLL Job List (Continued) 

- 23 - 

EO3-11070 


DLL Item Code Condition Remarks 

Function Key 534 Anytime It is not loaded to terminals programmed 

with a keyboard of any 

key layout different from that of the 

Master. 

Negative Amount Key Limit 535 Anytime 

Drawer Warning Time 538 Anytime 

Read/Reset Report Name 539 Anytime 

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount 540 Anytime Available on V2.0 or after 

Age Limit Table 541 Anytime Available on V2.0 or after 

Foreign Currency Rounding Table, 1-digit type 548 Anytime 

Foreign Currency Rounding Table, 2-digit type 549 Anytime 

Barcode Individual Flag Type 555 Anytime 

EFT Key Status Setting 565 Anytime Available on V3.0 or after 

EFT Information Setting 566 Anytime Available on V3.0 or after 

EFT Card Type Descriptor Setting 567 Anytime Available on V3.0 or after 

In-line Transmission Information 570 Anytime 

RAM Allocation 

Percent Rate 

Selective Itemizer Rate 

579 Anytime 

Foreign Currency Rate 

Tax Table 

GST Rate 

500 Anytime 

Entire Program DLL 1 590 After all Daily & 

GT Reset 

Entire Program DLL 2 591 After all Daily & 

GT Reset

DISPLAY INDICATIONS OF DLL OPERATIONS 

- 24 - 

EO3-11070 


The followings are displayed in the 16-digit dot windows, 10-digit 7-segment window, and IN-LINE Lamp of the 

Operator Display panel during a DLL execution: 

 

SLIP 

IN-LINE 

SIGN ON 

ALM 

R OFF 

Illuminated 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

************************ 

P5XX 

************************ 

Number of ECRs unserviced 

 

The IN-LINE Lamp flickers. 

PRINT FORMAT OF DLL OPERATIONS 

Master Terminal Receipt 

0035 14:43TM 

➤ 

5xx = Submode No. of the specific 

DLL operation 

blink 

P 5 9 0 

DLL Code 

Made Indication =SET mode 

Satellite Terminal Journal 

*P5xx 18:02TM* 

➤ 

➤ 

Time of receiving the DLL 

TL 

ST 

CG

7. RESERVATION AND IN-LINE REPORTS 

- 25 - 

EO3-11070 


As for Reservation and In-line Read/Reset reports in the Master-Satellite System, refer to the MA-1650 Owner’s 

Manual (for Master-Satellite System).

8. INQUIRIES 

- 26 - 

EO3-11070 


This chapter describes various inquiries made from each terminal to the Master Terminal and affect data (sales data 

updating). 

8.1 PLU INQUIRIES 

When the feature “PLUs to be inquired” is selected and a PLU is entered in a sale (entered manually or through 

a barcode) on each terminal, the terminal inquires the PLU to the Master Terminal. The inquired Master Terminal 

searches the PLU code in the PLU Main Table and the PLU Additional Table. 

When the PLU exists, the Master Terminal responds the price, name, and other required data to the inquiring 

terminal. 

When the applicable PLU code does not exist in the Master Terminal, the message “CODE ERROR” (standard 

program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring terminal. 

PLU URGENT MAINTENANCE 

When the inquired PLU code does not exist in the Master Terminal, the PLU can be programmed into the 

Master Terminal (and the Backup Master Terminal) along with its sale entry on the terminal by entering the 

linked Department and the price. The PLU thus entered is temporarily programmed in the PLU Additional 

Table. 

By the URGENT MAINTENANCE operation, the entered PLU can further be programmed in the PLU Main 

Table by the PLU Merge operation. 

AFFECT 

When a PLU entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text to the Master Terminal (and 

Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal). 

8.2 CUSTOMER FILE (CHECK TRACK) INQUIRIES 

When the feature “Customer File (Check Track)” (instead of PB Manual Entry) is selected and a PICK UP 

BALANCE (by [PICK UP BAL]) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the entered Customer File Code 

to the Master Terminal. The inquired Master Terminal searches the Customer File Code in the Customer File 

Table. 

When the Customer File Code exists, the Master Terminal responds the name and the previous balance of 

the Customer File to the inquiring terminal. 

NEW CUSTOMER FILE INQUIRIES 

When a NEW CUSTOMER FILE (by [CODE OPEN] key) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the 

new Customer File code entered to the Master Terminal. The Master Terminal confirms that the inquired 

Customer File code does not exist, then adds it to the Customer File table, and responds to the inquiring 

terminal that the code has been additionally set. (If a Backup Master is connected, the code inquiry to and 

additional setting in the Backup Master Terminal occur at the same time.)

AFFECT 

- 27 - 

EO3-11070 


When a Customer File entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text to the Master 

terminal (and Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the Master Terminal (and Backup 

Master Terminal). 

NOTE: When the applicable file code does not exist on a Customer File Code inquiry (by [PICK UP BAL]) 

or when the applicable file code exists on a New Customer File Code inquiry (by [CODE OPEN]), 

the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring 

terminal. 

8.3 CREDIT CARD NO. INQUIRIES TO THE NEGATIVE CHECK FILE 

When the “Negative Card Check” feature is selected by system option, each terminal inquires to the Master 

Terminal whether the entered Credit Card No. is acceptable or not. The Master Terminal, thus inquired, searches 

the Card No. in the Negative Card File. 

When the applicable Card No. exists in the Negative Card File, the Master Terminal responds to the inquiring 

terminal the response message “CALL MANAGER” (standard program; programmable) displayed in the Dotdisplay 

Windows with the Error Status Code (programmable in Submode 54) in the 7-segment Windows on 

the inquiring terminal to indicate that the Card No. is not acceptable. 

8.4 CASHIER OCCUPY INQUIRIES 

When the “Floating Cashier” feature is selected and a Cashier Code is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires 

the cashier code corresponding to cashier code entered to the Master Terminal. The Master Terminal searches 

the Cashier Table of the Cashier No. in the Cashier File. 

When the the Cashier No. exists and its table is not occupied by any other terminal, the Master Terminal makes 

the cashier in the occupied status and sends the cashier table to the inquiring terminal. 

When the Cashier No. does not exist in the Master Terminal’s Cashier File, the Master Terminal responds the 

message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) to the inquiring terminal. When the Cashier 

Table is occupied by another terminal, the message “OCCUPY” (standard program; programmable) is 

responded instead. 

AFFECT 

When a sale entry is determined (i.e. finalized) on a terminal, the terminal sends AFFECT text to the Master 

Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal) and updates the sales data (in the Cashier Table) of the Master 

Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal). 

CASHIER CANCEL INQUIRES (OCCUPY CANCEL) 

When a Sign-OFF is operated on a terminal, the terminal inquires a CASHIER CANCEL to the Master Terminal. 

The Master Terminal cancels the occupied status of the applicable cashier.

9. BACKUP DATA CONTROL 

9.1 OVERVIEW OF BACKUP FUNCTION 

- 28 - 

EO3-11070 


By connecting a Backup Master Terminal (Terminal ID No. 2) to the Master-Satellite System, the Center File in 

the Master Terminal will be backed up. Thus, if the Master Terminal becomes down, the Backup Master can 

replace the Master function to continue operation. (For further details of the recovery operation, refer to Chapter 

8. DOWN RECOVERY in the document of SYSTEM EXPLANATION.) 

Files that can be backed up 

Table File Type of Data to be backed up 

Cashier Table Program Data & Sales Data 

(for Floating Cashier System only) 

Cashier Table Program Data & Sales Data 

(for Floating Cashier System only) 

PLU Table (Main) Program Data & Sales Data 

(only when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is 

selected (i.e. when the Center File is used) 

PLU Additional Table Program Data & Sales Data 



Customer File (Check Track) Table Program Data & Sales Data 

Link PLU Table Program Data 



Negative Card Table Program Data 

PC Transmission Information Table Program Data 

NOTES: 1. The “Transaction Data Capture” (described in Chapter 10) will not be backed up. 

2. Neither “RAM Allocation (Submode 79)” nor “Terminal Connection Table (Submode 69)” will be 

backed up because each terminal has the same data. 

9.2 PROCESS AT CHANGING PROGRAM DATA 

1) At receiving DLL Data from PC: 

The Master Terminal, on receiving various center files from the PC, automatically performs backup of the 

program data and sales data to the Backup Master Terminal. 

PC➤ 

[1] DLL Data 

[2] Backup Data 

➤ 


➤ Backup 


[4] Response [3] Response 

➤ 

2) At programming operation on Master Terminal: 

When various center files are programmed on the Master Terminal (including Data Clear), the applicable 

Backup Error Flag is turned ON. At this moment, however, the backup data update process is not performed. 

(Refer to Sections “9.5. BACKUP ERROR FLAG” and “9.6. BACKUP DATA UPDATE PROCESS.”)

9.3 SALES DATA UPDATE PROCESS 

- 29 - 

EO3-11070 


When sales data has been entered on a terminal, the terminal sends AFFECT data to the Master Terminal to 

update the sales data in the Center File. Then the terminal sends the same data to the Backup Master Terminal 

to update the Backup Data also. 


➤ 

➤ 

➤ 

[1] 

[2] 

Satellite 

➤ 

[1] 

➤ 

Backup 


[2] [1] 

[2] 

Satellite 

9.4 BACKUP DATA CHECKING 

: Affect Data 

: Backup Data, 

Updating Affect Data 

The Master Terminal sends a Version Request command to the Backup Master Terminal every certain period of 

time, and receives the Version information of the Backup Master Terminal. The Master Terminal checks matching 

between the Version information from the Backup Master and the Master Terminal’s own Center File. When an 

error is found, the Backup Error Flag is turned ON. (Refer to Sections “9.5. BACKUP ERROR FLAG.”) 

NOTE: When the Master Terminal is in IN-LINE servicing status (i.e. with IN-LINE Lamp illuminated) or in PCjob 

status, no backup data checking is performed. 

9.5 BACKUP ERROR FLAG 

When a difference arises between the Master Terminal’s own data and the Backup Master Terminal’s Backup 

data, the Master Terminal turns ON the Backup Error Flag of the file in which the difference is found. 

The following are the seven different timings to turn ON the Backup Error Flag: 

(1) When the Center File program data has been changed on the Master Terminal. 

(2) When a Version difference has arisen in Backup Data checking. 

(3) When a backup job has failed after receiving a center file DLL from the PC. 

(4) When backup data updating has failed after resetting the center file. 

(5) When a Data Clear of the Master Terminal has been operated. 

(6) When a Backup Master Terminal has been added by the Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69). 

(7) Mergence of backup data is not correctly performed by PLU merge operation (when the feature “PLU to 

be inquired” is selected). 

➤ 

➤ 

➤

- 30 - 

EO3-11070 


While the Backup Error Flag is ON, the following actions will be made: 

1) Every time a long receipt is issued from the Master Terminal, a short buzzer tone is generated to warn 

the operator of the Backup Error occurrence. 

2) On operating RTR Declaration Cancel, a “Manual Data Copy Compulsory” error occurs, displaying 

“PLEASE BACK UP” (standard program; programmable). In this case, the RTR Declaration Cancel will 

be accepted only after a manual copying operating. 

The following are the two different timings to turn OFF the Backup Error Flag: 

(1) When the backup data has been updated correctly by the backup data updating process. 

(2) When the Backup Master (ID=2) has been deleted from the connection in the Terminal Connection Table. 

9.6 BACKUP DATA UPDATE PROCESS 

The process for a Backup Error occurrence is determined by System Option, Address 46 - Bit 1 status selection, 

as described below. Even when status “Auto Data Copy” is selected, manual data copying is possible as well. 

Auto Data Copy (Address 46 - Bit 1 SET): 

When the Backup Error Flag turns ON, the Master Terminal automatically sends to the Backup Master 

Terminal the file whose version matching is found to be different, to perform a backup data update process. 

Manual Data Copy (Address 46 - Bit 1 RESET): 

By the operator’s manual operation, updating of the backup data is performed. (Refer to “MANUAL COPY 

OF BACKUP DATA” in “12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS.”) 

NOTE: While the Master Terminal is in in-line service (i.e. with IN-LINE Lamp illuminated), no backup data 

update processes are performed. (If the Backup Error Flag turns ON during an in-line service, a Manual 

Data Copy operation will be compulsory on canceling the RTR Declaration.)

10. TRANSACTION DATA CAPTURE 

- 31 - 

EO3-11070 


The Transaction Data Capture function is possible when the features of “PC Connected” and “With Transaction Data 

Capture Function” are both selected in System Options. This function enables to store details of sale entries made 

on each terminal into the Master Terminal as transaction data, and to transfer the data by request of the PC. 

TRANSACTION DATA CONTROL 

1) Transaction Data Buffering 

Each terminal sends to the Master Terminal the transaction data (data of a sale finalized) when each 

transaction is finalized. On V2.0 or after, each terminal also sends the transaction data to the Master 

Terminal when the transaction buffer becomes full during registrations. 

The Master Terminal, on receiving transaction data, stores the transaction data in the Transaction Data 

Buffer. 

The Transaction Data is to be controlled usually by two buffers. One is for buffering transaction data, 

and the other is used for PC’s data collection. When the first buffer becomes full or requested by PC, 

it is released to the PC and buffering is switched to the other one. 

The capacity of the Transaction Data Buffer is specified in RAM ALLOCATION SETTING (Submode 

79). The specified capacity is the total value of the two buffers described above. By performing a TABLE 

CLEAR (Submode 91), the Transaction Buffer of the Master Terminal will be forcibly cleared. 

2) Transaction Data Collection 

By request of the PC, the transaction data stored in the Master Terminal is sent to the PC. For a 

Transaction Data Request command from the PC, the Master Terminal will send the transaction data 

in the buffer that has been full. If neither buffers are full, the transaction data in the buffer that is now 

functioning for transaction data buffering will be sent to the PC. Thus for one Transaction Data Request 

command, the data stored in one buffer will be collected. 

3) Process for Transaction Buffer Full 

The Master Terminal checks the vacant capacity of the Transaction Data Buffer on receiving transaction 

data from each terminal. When the received transaction data cannot be stored in the buffer, the Master 

Terminal sends the response to indicate the buffer-full condition to the terminal. (In this system, no 

warning will be made on the remaining capacity of the Transaction Data Buffer.) On receiving this 

response, the terminal prints on its journal that the transaction data has not been sent. 

4) Process for Transaction Data Sending Failure 

When the transaction data cannot be sent to the Master Terminal due to some error, the message “IRC 

CONNECT ERR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the terminal and operation is 

stopped.

11. TRANSMISSION ERROR 

- 32 - 

Terminal ID of the 

other station 

EO3-11070 


When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the inquiry to the other 

station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on 

that terminal and operation is stopped. 

When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving DLL data, 

the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals, etc., the message 

“MASTER IS BUSY” (standard program; programmable) is displayed and operation is stopped. 

11.1 CAUSE OF ERROR 

11.1.1 “IRC CONNECT ERR” 

a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut, Master Terminal’s 

Power-OFF, etc.). 

b) Communication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it correctly. 

11.1.2 “MASTER IS BUSY” 

Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes: 

a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC. 

b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal. 

c) Backup data updating process is under way. 

d) Read/Reset Report taking operation is under way on the Master Terminal. (inapplicable to a system 

with the CVS spec. selected) 

e) ULL operations are under way on the Master Terminal. 

f) Copy of the relevant table into the communication buffer area is under way on the Master Terminal. 

(Applicable to a system with the CVS spec. selected). 

11.2 ERROR DISPLAY 

IRC CONNECT ERR 

 

I R C C O N N E C T E R 0 1

MASTER IS BUSY 

 

M A S T E R I S B U S Y 

- 33 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTE: The display contents in the 7-segment portion remains the same as before the error occurrence. The 

error status will be canceled by the [C] key. 

11.3 ERROR CANCELING PROCESS 

There are two error-canceling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents. 

Type 1: Depressing the [C] key will return to the statuses before the inquiry. 

Applicable Jobs: 

• PLU Inquiry 

• PLU Urgent Maintenance 

• Customer File (Check Track) Inquiry 

• Credit Card No. Inquiry to the Negative Check File 

• Cashier Occupy Inquiry 

Type 2: Depressing the [C] key will cancel the error status, displays the following message, and waits for RETRY 

or CANCEL. 

Applicable Jobs: 

• PLU Affect 

• Customer File Affect 

• Cashier Affect 

• Cashier Cancel Inquiry 

• Transaction Data Send 

R E T R Y ? 

 

For Retry ..... [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.) 

For Cancel ..... [X] → [ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “∗∗ X → ST ∗∗”) 

NOTE: The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is for only the case the other station is in trouble which cannot 

be recovered by a Retry operation.

12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS 

- 34 - 

EO3-11070 


The following are other operations relating to in-line service operations but not described in the preceding chapters. 


page 

TIME OUT ...................................................................................................................................... 34 

SUSPENDING ................................................................................................................................ 35 

RETRY ........................................................................................................................................... 35 

INCOMPLETE ENDING ................................................................................................................. 35 

CANCEL ......................................................................................................................................... 36 

TERMINAL OPEN CHECK ............................................................................................................ 37 

TERMINAL CONDITION CHECK .................................................................................................. 38 

ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION ................................................................................ 39 

MANUAL COPY OF BACKUP DATA ............................................................................................. 40 

READ OF INFORMATION ALREADY COPIED IN COMMUNICATION BUFFER 

(Only for a system with the CVS spec. selected) ........................................................................... 40 

ENFORCED CLEAR OF COMMUNICATION BUFFER 

(Only for a system with the CVS spec. selected) ........................................................................... 40

TIME OUT 

- 35 - 

EO3-11070 


A Time-Out condition arises when the Master Terminal is making an in-line service operation, such as X/Z report 

collection, DLL, etc. to the Satellite Terminals. The service timer is provided for servicing each of the Satellite 

Terminals, thus on exceeding the time limit, a Time-Out condition will occur. In this case, a “RETRY”, 

“SUSPENDING”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation will be accepted. 

ex. 1) In a system with a Master Terminal and 3 Satellite Terminals: 

MASTER 

TERMINAL 

MASTER 

TERMINAL 

busy S1 busy S2 S3 

When a report collection is executed on the Master Terminal, a series of data collections from each terminal (S1 

to S3) will be performed, but services for S1 and S2 will be skipped due to their “busy” conditions. Thereafter, 

services will again be attempted to S1 and S2. As a limit of 30 seconds is provided for servicing each terminal, 

the total service time in this case will be 30 sec. x 2 units = 60 sec. If data collection is successfully done from 

S1 within this time limit, servicing S2 follows for the rest of the time, and on reaching the time limit, the Time-Out 

condition arises, displaying on the Master Terminal the number of not-yet collected terminal(s) and the Store/ 

Register No. of the last serviced terminal. On this stage, the operator may only go on to “SUSPENDING” (to wait 

for a while until S2 clears the “busy” condition), or to “RETRY” (to execute collection service to S2 again, expecting 

that S2 has already cleared the “busy” condition), or to “INCOMPLETE ENDING” (to abandon the service to S2 

and end with collection of the data of so-far collected terminals only), or to “CANCEL” operation. If “RETRY” is 

operated, the service time now is 30 seconds because only one terminal remains uncollected. 

ex. 2) 

busy S1 No response 

(Power OFF) 

S2 S3 

In this case, S2 is in a “No response” condition and S1 is in a “busy” condition. As only one terminal is responding 

with some kind of status, a time out limit of 30 seconds is given (the “No response” status is not subject to the 

service timer). However, if S2 turns into a “Power ON” condition, it will also be subject to the service timer.

SUSPENDING 

- 36 - 

EO3-11070 


This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any terminals remain 

unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation as the next step. 

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed) 

Depress [ITEM CORR] until the key-in tone is generated. 

DESCRIPTION: 

The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure. 

If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master terminal’s display indicates the number of 

unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not possible). Now a “RETRY” 

or “INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next step. (When no key-in operations are made 

in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.) 

RETRY 

This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due to “TIME OUT” 

or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation. 

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed) 

Depress [AT/TL]. 

DESCRIPTION: 

The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible any number 

of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any terminals remain 

unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a 

RETRY process will automatically be executed.) 

INCOMPLETE ENDING 

This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with the services 

to service-completed terminals only. 

OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed) 

Depress [NS]. 

DESCRIPTION: 

If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal status of 

any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or “RETRY” operations, the [NS] key can be 

depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals serviced and the unserviced 

terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report Collection sequences, reports of only the 

service-completed terminals will be issued.

As part of the print out, the Store/Reg. No. of the terminal and its status will be printed. 

CANCEL 

Status Print Format 

No nnnnnn ? 

➤ 

Store/Register No. 

- 37 - 

EO3-11070 


This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPENDING operation. 

The entire in-line service being performed is canceled. This operation is effective to in-line read report operations 

but not to any in-line reset report operations. 

OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X) 

Depress [X]. 

DESCRIPTION: 

The CANCEL symbol is printed as in the following. 

CANCEL Print Format 

======================== 

➤ 

Status Symbol 

?: No response (power off, etc.) 

BUSY: The terminal is busy (during a sale, etc.) 

Blank: Other statuses

TERMINAL OPEN CHECK 

- 38 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE (Submode 

69), and prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not responding). 

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal) 

OPERATION Mode Lock: X and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

80 [AT/TL] 

Master Terminal Receipt Print 

When the check result is normal: When any error status is found: 

Prints the Report Name only. Prints the Register Nos of the 

terminals not connected properly, 

as well as the Report Name. 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

************************ 

NOT CONNECT 

************************ 

0035 14:43TM 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

************************ 

NOT CONNECT 

#3003 

************************ 

0024 14:36TM

TERMINAL CONDITION CHECK 

- 39 - 

EO3-11070 


This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status responded from the 

terminals. 


OPERATION Mode Lock: X and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

81 [AT/TL] 

Master Terminal Receipt Print 



PHONE : 87-6437 



12-19-1994 MON #1 

************************ 

T/M CHECK 

#111101 OK 

************************ 

0036 14:44TM 

Status Symbol 

OK: The terminal condition is normal. 

?: No response (power-OFF, etc.) 

BUSY: The terminal is busy (during a sale, etc.). 

Blank: Other statuses

ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION (on Individual Terminals) 

- 40 - 

EO3-11070 


When a Master job execution is under way (DLL, Consolidated Read/Reset, etc.), the Master Terminal or the PC 

suddenly becomes down, accordingly the connected terminals turns into HOLD condition, and the HOLD 

condition cannot be cleared. In such cases, this operation is useful. (It is effective to the HOLD condition of the 

Master Terminal caused by a PC-start operation.) 

CONDITION Any terminal in HOLD condition 

OPERATION Mode Lock: Z 

9999 [AT/TL] 

NOTES: 1. When the Master Terminal’s HOLD condition is cleared, the PC job-ON status that is controlled 

in the Master Terminal is also cleared. After clearing the HOLD condition of the Master Terminal, 

various in-line jobs started by the Master Terminal will be accepted (in case the PC is down). 

2. If the PC or the Master Terminal becomes down during a DLL execution, the program data by the 

DLL execution may not be set correctly. Therefore, perform programming or DLL again after 

clearing the HOLD condition of each terminal. 

3. After this HOLD clear operation, the IN-LINE Lamp will be extinguished. 

MANUAL COPY OF BACKUP DATA 

While the backup error message “PLEASE BACK UP” (standard program; programmable) is displayed, the 

following operation will enforce the Master Terminal to send program data and sales data to the Backup Master 

Terminal to update the backup data. 


OPERATION Mode Lock: Z and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

900 [AT/TL] 

NOTES: 1. While the backup data is being updated, any inquiry from each terminal may result in displaying 

the message “MASTER IS BUSY.” Therefore, cancel the error status by the [C] key, then wait 

for the Master Terminal job to be completed, and re-execute it. 

2. Only the program data and sales data subject to the backup error occurrence will be sent. 

3. Even if the feature “Auto Copy of Backup Data” is selected, this manual copying operation will be 

possible.

- 41 - 

EO3-11070 


READ OF INFORMATION ALREADY COPIED IN COMMUNICATION BUFFER 

This operation issues report names of which sales data have been already copied in the communication buffer. 

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale 

OPERATION Mode Lock: X 

96 [AT/TL] 

NOTE: The following contents are printed. 

• Distinction of report (Read or Reset) 

• Transaction name 

ENFORCED CLEAR OF COMMUNICATION BUFFER 

This operation forcibly clears the content already copied in the communication buffer. 

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale 

OPERATION Mode Lock: X 

96 [AT/TL] 

NOTE: This operation should be performed only when malfunction of PC or Master Terminal occurs. Therefore, 

the memory content is not guaranteed if this operation is performed when a system is normal.

Reference: MA-1650-4 Allocation Capacities 

Allocation items and the number of bytes per record are shown in the following. 

Item Number of bytes/record 

Cashier 2.683 

(Local & Center Files) 

PLU 69 


Check Track 28 


Data Capture 16 

Negative Card 11 

- 42 - 

EO3-11070 


NOTES: 1. The following bytes are obtained for the additional PLU File (200 PLUs). 

Additional PLU File = 69 bytes x 200 = 13.800 bytes 

2. The minimum unit for the setting number of PLUs, Check Tracks, Data Captures or Negative 

Cards is 100.

TEC Ma-1650 program manual - 4S Business Systems Inc.

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?